28
8/10/2019 John Leavitt Words and worlds http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1/28 2014 | H: Journal of Ethnographic Teory  4 (2): 193–220 This work is licensed under the Creative Commons | © John Leavitt. ISSN 2049-1115 (Online). DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.14318/hau4.2.009 COLLOQUIA Words and worlds Ethnography and theories of translation John L, Université de Montréal If different languages orient the speaker toward different aspects of experience, then translation can be seen as a passage between lived worlds. This paper traces out some key moments in the history of translation theory in the modern West and argues that translation and ethnography require each other. Free of the constraint that professional translators produce easily digestible texts for the target audience, anthropologists are particularly well placed to carry out translations that take context seriously into account, as well as ethnographies centered on texts. Such “ugly” translations (Ortega y Gasset) can force the reader to work to reorient him- or herself, to cross a boundary into what is potentially another world, initially another language-world. Through the history, we seek to distinguish the translation of referential content, something that is always possible, and translating stylistic and indexical (contextual) elements, something that has often been declared impossible. The paper draws some of the implications of these arguments on the basis of text-artifacts constructed from Central Himalayan oral traditions. Keywords: translation, ethnography, history, poetics, Central Himalayas Introduction Of the human sciences, only anthropology has consistently taken seriously the idea that beside or beyond the evident fact that all human beings live in the same world, there is a sense in which they live or have lived in different worlds. Since Boas, these have been called “cultures,” 1  and have recently returned as “ontologies.” As it hap- pens, the cultures that seem to be most different from the ones that have produced most anthropologists are those that have been colonized and transformed. Are we to think of an Australian or African tribal group as living in a different world, or rather as peripheral lumpen proletarians? How important is what is distinctive? 1. Boas is the first to have used the word “culture” in the plural in English (Stocking 1968). The plural use in German (Kulturen) had been established in the late nineteenth cen- tury by Lazarus, Steinthal, and the school of Völkerpsychologie (Kalmar 1987).

John Leavitt Words and worlds

  • Upload
    koyowa

  • View
    230

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

This work is licensed under the Creative Commons | copy John LeavittISSN 2049-1115 (Online) DOI httpdxdoiorg1014318hau42009

COLLOQUIA

Words and worldsEthnography and theories of translation

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 Universiteacute de Montreacuteal

If different languages orient the speaker toward different aspects of experience thentranslation can be seen as a passage between lived worlds This paper traces out somekey moments in the history of translation theory in the modern West and argues thattranslation and ethnography require each other Free of the constraint that professionaltranslators produce easily digestible texts for the target audience anthropologists areparticularly well placed to carry out translations that take context seriously into accountas well as ethnographies centered on texts Such ldquouglyrdquo translations (Ortega y Gasset)can force the reader to work to reorient him- or herself to cross a boundary into what ispotentially another world initially another language-world Through the history we seekto distinguish the translation of referential content something that is always possible andtranslating stylistic and indexical (contextual) elements something that has often beendeclared impossible The paper draws some of the implications of these arguments on thebasis of text-artifacts constructed from Central Himalayan oral traditions

Keywords translation ethnography history poetics Central Himalayas

Introduction

Of the human sciences only anthropology has consistently taken seriously the ideathat beside or beyond the evident fact that all human beings live in the same worldthere is a sense in which they live or have lived in different worlds Since Boas thesehave been called ldquoculturesrdquo1 and have recently returned as ldquoontologiesrdquo As it hap-pens the cultures that seem to be most different from the ones that have producedmost anthropologists are those that have been colonized and transformed Are weto think of an Australian or African tribal group as living in a different world orrather as peripheral lumpen proletarians How important is what is distinctive

1 Boas is the first to have used the word ldquoculturerdquo in the plural in English (Stocking 1968)

The plural use in German (Kulturen) had been established in the late nineteenth cen-tury by Lazarus Steinthal and the school of Voumllkerpsychologie (Kalmar 1987)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 194

As Bridget OrsquoLaughlin wrote (1978 103) what is distinctive about the zebra is itsstripes but stripes are hardly the most important aspect of a zebrarsquos life

Yet what is most important to people themselves depends in part on their his-torical situation and their expectations these need not always be the same every-where at every time Existing in a situation of starvation and disease is not the wayany human being or any organism wishes to live But once you can eat and feedand protect your children then other factors come into play These factors may beconscious or close to consciousness or as in the case of the language one speaksthey may be largely unconscious And the record shows that these world-makingfactors can be extraordinarily diverse

This means that human values goals and conceptualizations are themselvesdiverse and maybe even incommensurable (Povinelli 2001) insofar as concep-tions differ lived worlds may be said to differ Probably the most blatant diversityis that of human languages this very diversity being one of the important lan-guage universals This is a simple fact the species speaks or has spoken thousandsof different mutually unintelligible languages How seriously should this diversitybe taken Some say not at all according to Noam Chomsky if a Martian arrivedon Earth and observed how children learn language he (in these parables it isalways a male Martian) would say that there is only one human language within Steven Pinkerrsquos oxymoron mutually unintelligible dialects (Pinker 1994 240)On the other side both George Steiner (1975) and Claude Hagegravege (1985) usethe same parable to opposite effect both say that if a Martian arrived on earthand observed human physical variation he would assume that there were maybea dozen human languagesmdashinstead of the five to ten thousand we actually find

(for discussion of the Martian parable paradox seeLeavitt 2011 5ndash6) Diversitygoes all the way up and down the levels of language structure from sound to thedividing of experience in lexicon to the directing of attention to one or anotheraspect of experience by pervasive grammatical categories to genres of discoursethe kinds of things one is expected to say and hear in a given society Both themusic and the meanings of languages are organized differently for each onemdashandagain there are thousands This gives the continuing impression through thegenerations that different languages convey different worlds (Sapir 1921 120ndash21Friedrich 1986 16)

The idea that ethnography is a kind of translation (Asad 1986 Rubel and Rosman

2003 and see the essays in this issue) has largely been treated metaphorically asan implication of the broader movement to see cultures as texts to be interpreted(Geertz 1973 Ricoeur 1973) Now (Hanks and Severi this issue) we are seeing anattempt to use the idea of translation as an alternative both to fixed cognitive uni-

versals and to an ontological pluralism of sealed worlds implying instead a focuson the processes of exchange and transfer not only between societies (ldquoculturesrdquo)but also between different social classes genders caste groupings within societieswhich in fact define all social interaction

There is however a risk here as there is in any analogy By extending the ideaof translation out of language into culture more broadly we weaken its force of sur-

prise Languages that are mutually unintelligible are absolutely so To recap RomanJakobsonrsquos functions of language (1960) when someone speaks say Turkishmdashone

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

195 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the approximately 9990 languages that I absolutely do not know2 I do not un-derstand a single word The referential function is missing or rather was neverthere A unilingual Turkish friend and I may be very phatic together over coffeeI may feel strong aspects of his expressivity he can be effectively conative in get-ting me to jump out of the way of an oncoming bus I may even sense some ofthe rhythm and alliteration if he recites a poem but as long as he keeps speakingTurkish there is no referential content unless the two of us start working hard andfor a long time on the metalinguistic functionmdashwhich is to say that we start learn-ing each otherrsquos languages

Note how different this is from what is called translating culture Since whatwe call culture includes virtually all aspects of life as soon as I arrive in again sayTurkey I think I recognize all kinds of things houses restaurants markets placesof worship men and women children and adults dressing somewhat differentlyfrom each other and occupying somewhat different roles I can immediately beginto form impressions on what might someday become ethnographies of the econo-my politics social organization religion We can call these translations and theyshare characteristics with interlingual translations But there is a precious opacityto languages that other human practices do not share or do not share so unavoid-ably Staying close to actual linguistic translation practice offers ethnographers asalutary reminder of how much in all aspects of a culture they do not understand

As against the model or metaphor of the text an alternative tradition of philol-ogy and ethnopoetics has opted rather for what we might call the metonym of thetext texts exist in cultures and in particular linguistic media In this view texts areseen not as ldquofragments of culturerdquo (Silverstein and Urban 1996 1) but as cultural

foci incomprehensible outside of their cultural and social situations and above allmade of language which is to say always a particular distinct languageThe fact of linguistic difference involves every level of language from the un-

translatability of phonetics and phonology (Webster 2014) to that of the universeof presuppositions out of which the source text arises with levels of lexicon andgrammatical architecture in between Moving from one language to another andtrying to have coherent ldquonormalrdquo texts in both must necessarily mean suppres-sions and additionsmdashwhat A L Becker (1995) following Ortega y Gasset callsdeficiencies and exuberances what John McDowell (2000) calls muting and add-ing Yet it seems to go without saying that modern Western translation whether

literary translation or the mass of ldquousefulrdquo that is business government and otherorganizational translation has as its central often its only goal to convey what areconsidered the necessary or useful aspects of the referential meaning of a text intoanother language

But producing such a usable text that is a normal-sounding or normal-readingtext in the target language (to use the rather frightening terminology of translationtheory) requires alterations of what was there in the source text even in its referen-tial meanings at every level of language The original is thinned out (deficiency) orelse one feels it has been thickened up with material that wasnrsquot there in the original(exuberance) This situation is all the more acute if we hope to convey not only the

2 I use the figure of ten thousand attested human languages The figure ranges from fiveto ten thousand depending on what is considered a language and what a dialect

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 196

referential sense but also something of the style and poetics of the original or itsrole in its own society (Silverstein 2003)

Sensitive or suspicious readers have long felt that this transmogrification in- volves loss or betrayal as is conveyed in the many derogatory aphorisms abouttranslation traduttore traditore ldquotranslator [=] traitorrdquo (a classic bit of metaprag-matics that illustrates itself in its patterned untranslatability) a translation is aldquophantom limbrdquo (Robinson 1996 [1997]) ldquoa translation is like a stewed strawberryrdquo(attributed to Harry de Forest Smith in Brower 1959 173) This last simile conveysboth the maintenance of something through translation and at the same time theloss of freshness that is of complexity and also evidently of structure But theconverse conveying all of the meanings carried in the source statement and onlythose requires creating a ldquomonstrosityrdquo (McDowell 2000) in the target languageIn this theoretical sense of full transference from one to another normal linguisticframe translation is impossible And yet in practice it is both possible and neces-sary In Franz Rosenzweigrsquos words ldquoTranslating means serving two masters It fol-lows that no one can do it But it follows also that it is like everything that no onecan do in theory everyonersquos task in practicerdquo (1926 [1994] 47)3

Given this reality ldquonormalrdquo ordinary translation what Jakobson (1959a) callsinterlingual translation or translation in the strict sense already carries a huge con-ceptual and cultural load any translation is a translation of cultures or worlds If wetake language diversity seriously at all then translators are on the front line theyare pilots traversing a relativistic linguistic universe

Here I will offer a brief run through some modern Western ideas about trans-lation highlighting what seem to me to be particularly acute formalizations and

propose a radical view of translation that seems particularly suited to anthropolo-gists Going over this material seems important for an anthropological audiencethe history of translation theory in the West parallels that of anthropology as a his-tory of attitudes toward other ways of saying and thinking4

The following part of the paper will explore a single example drawn from aritual performance carried out in the Central Himalayas of northern India

Renaissance diversity

From the sixteenth century over a relatively short time the Western Europeanworld based on an agricultural economy a fixed hierarchical social organizationand concomitant ideology and the cultural dominance of Latin was transformed

3 ldquoUumlbersetzen heiszligt zwei Herren dienen Also kann es Niemand Also ist es wie alleswas theoretisch besehen niemand kann praktisch jedermanns Aufgaberdquo Cf Sapirrsquosstatements that two languages could be incommensurable while it was clear that henever questioned the possibility of translation To be incommensurable means to beoperating with different coordinate systems While ultimate and exact congruence can-not be achieved in this situation one can find equivalences that will serve all practicalpurposes (Leavitt 2011 136ndash38)

4 For histories from within translation studies see Berman ([1984] 1992) Venuti (1995)Bassnett (2014)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

197 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

The feudal economy and social order were being replaced by an expanding capital-ism nation-states were on the rise with the valorization of state vernacular languag-es against Latin Western societies were conquering and colonizing whole sectionsof the globe setting up a world political-economic system New philosophical sys-tems and experimental sciences were coming into being and the great political-ideological structure of the church was being challenged from within For manyscholars of the century new worlds in many senses of the word were opening upOne focus of debate was the relative value of vernacular languages versus Latinand Greek another was the accessibility of both scientific and biblical truth to themasses of people and much of the discussion turned on questions of translation

The dominant medieval view had been that the diversity of languages was acurse Godrsquos punishment for the human pride manifested in the construction ofthe Tower of Babel Both Protestant reformers in the center and north of Europeand Catholic language activists in France and Italy challenged this view and sawlanguage diversity either as a positive good or as a problem that could be handledthrough translation I will begin with the better-known Protestant theories butdevote more time to Italian views of diversity since I presume that these are lessfamiliar to anthropologists

Translation for some Reformation thinkers such as John Calvin (1509ndash64)at least allowed some mitigation of the curse of Babel What one could translatewas the meaning the sense of the text and this could be conveyed in vernaculartongues as well as in classical ones The question of whether and how to translateHoly Writ into vernacular languages became a central religious and political de-bate one of the central issues of the Reformation With the Bible translations of the

sixteenth century translation itself came to be an essential part of a double goalto reveal the referential meaning of Holy Writ to anyone who could read the ver-nacular thus dispossessing the clergy of their monopoly on sacred texts and at thesame time to valorize the vernacular itself as a national tongue since a part of theProtestant argument was for national churches headed in each case by the secularhead of the country not by the pope

In Protestant translation practice what is important is not the particular formof the language but that the referential meaning be conveyed in a colloquial ver-nacular that Everyman can understand This view was expressed clearly by Lutherthe goal is ldquoto produce clear language comprehensible to everyone with an un-

distorted sense and meaningrdquo (ldquoPreface to the Book of Jobrdquo cited in Rosenzweig[1926] 1994 48) ldquoin speech the meaning and subject matter must be considerednot the grammar for the grammar shall not rule over the meaningrdquo (ldquoTranslatorrsquosletterrdquo 1530 cited in Bassnett 2014 59) This view has continued to inspire Prot-estant translation theory up to this day notably that of the Summer Institute ofLinguistics true conversion requires that Godrsquos Word be accessible in the speakerrsquosown language (see eg Handman 2007)

In Italy parallel issues arose around the Questione della lingua what languageshould serve as the cultural cement for Italy now thought of as at least a potentialnational entity in spite of its political fragmentation Here the basic argument was

that the multiplicity of vernaculars was an aspect of the diversity of the world in it-self a good thing an expression of Godrsquos infinite creative power As Claude-GilbertDubois puts it about this period in Italy and in a France heavily influenced by

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 198

Italian thinking we ldquowitness a kind of ennobling of the multiple Multiplicationis not corruption but fecundityrdquo (1970 119)

This is an enormous shift from the medieval view of an ordered hierarchy itis no longer easy to tell what is superior and what is inferior In the words of theFlorentine humanist Benedetto Varchi (1503ndash65) ldquoIn the universe there must exist all the things that can exist and nothing is so small or so ugly (tanto picciolanegrave cosigrave laida) that it does not contribute and add to the perfection of the universerdquo(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 181) If even the smallest and ugliest thing adds to theperfection of the universe this implies a fundamental incommensurability insteadof a clear hierarchy perfection is an infinite scatter And this refusal of hierarchyapplies to languages as well one cannot assert the superiority of some languagesover others In his Dialogo delle lingue ([1542] 2009 35) the Paduan humanistSperone Speroni (1500ndash1588) has his mouthpiece assert ldquoI hold it certain that thelanguages of every country such as the Arabic and the Indian like the Roman andthe Athenian are of equal valuerdquo

The implication of this argument is then to challenge the Babel story and saythat the multiplicity and diversity of languages is neither a curse nor a mere felixculpa but a positive good a gift from God This was said explicitly by the Sienesehumanist Claudio Tolomei (1492ndash1556) ldquoFecund nature (la feconda natura) didnot accept that there should be a single form of speech in this great and variededifice of the worldrdquo (1531 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 180) Varchi for his partconcludes ldquoI say that nature could not and indeed perhaps should not have madea single language for the whole worldrdquo (cited in Demonet 1992 513)

Edward Stankiewicz sums up the views of this period ldquoOne of the central no-

tions in this program is the recognition that each of the individual living languag-es has a place in the overall scheme of things and that each of them is endowedwith linguistic properties which make up its distinctive character or lsquogeniusrsquordquo(1981 180)

The second part of this statement raises the notion of the distinctiveness of eachlanguage Languages are not only valuable but their value lies in their differing spe-cifics the distinctive character or genius of each one Dubois (1970 119) makes anexplicit link between the diversity of words and the new idea of an infinite pluralityof distinct worlds proposed by Giordano Bruno later in the century ldquoThe pluralityof languages like the plurality of worlds invented by Giordano Bruno during the

same period demonstrates the immense richness of the spiritrdquoBut the evocation of Bruno (1548ndash1600) raises a different point We have seenthat for Luther and for Reformation Bible translators generally what mattered wasa clear conveyance of referential meaningmdashprecisely not the exploitation of thespecific riches of each language Brunorsquos own defense of translation was based ona similar view of philosophical and what we would call scientific discourse Brunosaid that it was perfectly all right to read Aristotle in an Italian translation ratherthan the original Greek in that either of these permitted the reader to test Aristotlersquostheories empirically and so recognize Aristotlersquos errors Scientific knowledge wasbased not on the ldquopedantryrdquo of knowing Greek and Latin not on the word but on

knowledge of the worldUnlike the Bible translators the Italian theorists went on to justify a differentside of language use from that of either Scripture or science in literary and poetic

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

199 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

discourse the unique genius of each language comes into fruition as a form of so-cial play The Florentine shoemaker-sage Giovan Battista Gelli (1498ndash1563) writesthat ldquoevery language has its particularities and its caprices (capresterie)rdquo ([1551]1976 201ndash2) Varchi writes that Florentine has a ldquocertain peculiar or special orparticular property as do all other languagesrdquo and boasts of ldquocertain qualities andcapricious turns (certe proprietagrave e capestrerie) in which the Florentine languageaboundsrdquo And these turns are particularly apparent in everyday popular discourse(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182ndash83) Language cannot be encompassed in a definiteset of rules according to Varchi because the rational faculty is incapable of captur-ing the expressive power of language in everyday speech ldquoReason should prevailand win in all matters except in language where if reason is contrary to usage orusage to reason it is usage not reason which must always take precedencerdquo (citedin ibid 183)

The most famous phrasing of this distinctive quality was in Joachim du Bellayrsquos1549 Deffense et illustration de la langue franccediloyse Most of this text is a translationfrom Speronirsquos Dialogo but it is du Bellay who specifies that each language pos-sesses a certain je ne scais quoy propremdashand he makes this point as part of a discus-sion of the difficulties of translation as indeed do a number of Italian authors Eachlanguage has its own force and beauty ( forze e bellezza) which cannot be carriedover into another tongue Gelli ([1551] 1976 201) writes ldquoThey say that discourses(cose) that are translated from one language into another never have the same forceor beauty that they had in their own To say things in one language in the styleof another has no grace at allrdquo

Repeatedly the discussion of the distinctiveness of each language is part of the

discussion of the difficulties of translation The examples used are usually liter-ary ones Homer Virgil and Dante or Petrarchmdashand notably not Aristotlemdashnoneof whose work can be translated without losing its most important quality thedistinctive beauty of each We find the example in the De subtilitate (1550) of theperipatetic mathematician-physician Girolamo Cardano (1501ndash76)

The utility of the diversity of languages is that they can thereby expressall the affects of the soul The proof is that one cannot express Homerrsquossentences in Latin or in our mother tongue nor Virgil in Greek or in ourmother tongue and even less the poems of Francesco Petrarch in Latinor Greek (Cited in Dubois 1970 118)

Implicit in the discussion is a distinction between two goals of discourse thatof conveying information and that of projecting the force and beauty of a lan-guagemdashto use anachronistic terms between the referential and poetic functionsof language Translations from any language into any language can convey whatwe could call referential meaning but fail to convey play capresterie the force andbeauty deriving from specific circumstances of social life The distinction is cen-tral for Bruno and Gelli writes ldquoI know that translation is done for the sake ofsciences and not to display the power and beauty of languagesrdquo ([1551] 1976202 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182) The formal distinction of the two modes wasmade by Sir Francis Bacon (1561ndash1626) between literary grammar which dealswith languages and which cannot really render the je ne scai quoy of each languagein translation and philosophical grammar which deals with ldquothe analogy between

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 200

words and things or reasonrdquo (Huumlllen 2001 213) and is in fact adequate for theadvancement of learning

Already then different goals of translation were being distinguished in the sev-enteenth century For Protestants the Sacred Scripture plays the role of sciencefor Gelli or Bruno in both cases the goal is to convey clear meanings that are ofimmediate spiritual or secular use But both presume the possibility of anotherattitude one that fully recognizes the genius of each language This possibility isdeveloped above all by the Italians with their recognition that linguistic worlds areconstructed by bringing out the possibilities of each language in social interactionand in play

ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

By the early 1600s the French language and French style were dominating EuropeAlready in the previous century French discussion of translation had tended tobe nationalistic and notably contrasted the ldquodirect orderrdquo of the French sentence(SubjectndashVerbndashObject with adjectives coming for the most part after the noun)with the horrid mixup of Latin word order With the rise of Cartesian rationalismthe assumption came to be strongly reinforced that all human beings think in thesame way languages being a mere means of external formulation and communica-tion When Descartes himself was challenged (by Hobbes) as to whether what hecalled reason could really be merely a local way of linking words he replied ldquoWhodoubts that a Frenchman and a German can have the same thoughts or reasonings

about the same things despite the fact that the words they think of are complete-ly differentrdquo (Descartes 1984 II 125ndash26) In 1669 Descartesrsquo follower Louis LeLaboureur claimed that since everyone in the world thought in the direct order ofFrench the Romans too must have conceived their sentences in French then addeda step to scramble the syntax before speaking or writing

This basic position as well as a strong sense of cultural self-sufficiency mo-tivated French translation theory The argument was that the translator shouldreproduce not just the words of the text but also the effect it had on its originalreaders Since the text was not exotic or strange-sounding for its intended publicwe should translate it in a way that is not disturbing for our public If this requires

changing meanings so be it such changes will in fact often be an improvementon what are sometimes needlessly repetitive longwinded incoherent or indeli-cate originals And this applies equally to scientific religious and literary worksIn the words of the great translator of the century Nicolas Perrot drsquoAblancourt(1606ndash64)

It would be a Judaic superstition to attach oneself to the words andabandon the design for which they were used It is only rendering halfof an Author if one cuts off his eloquence As he was agreeable in his ownlanguage he should be so in ours as well and insofar as the beauties andgraces of the two are different we should not hesitate to give him those

of our own country since we are removing his Otherwise we would bemaking an ugly (meschante) copy of an admirable original (1638 citedin Horguelin 1996 76)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

201 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

When Perrotrsquos translation of Tacitusmdashin which he says he sought ldquoto look not somuch to what [the author] said as to what he should say ldquo (cited in ibid 78)mdashcameout during the 1640s the general opinion was that it was a great improvement onthe original But a more extreme statement accompanies his 1654 translation ofthe quite scatological Greek satirist Lucian of Samosata Plainly there is plenty inLucian that would shock seventeenth-century French sensibilities

It was necessary to change all this to make something agreeableotherwise it would not have been Lucian For this reason I do notalways attach myself to the words or the ideas of this Author andmaintaining his goal I arrange things to our air and our style Differenttimes require not only different words but different thoughts and it isthe custom of Ambassadors to dress in the fashion of the land to whichthey have been sent for fear of appearing ridiculous to those they aimto please It is true that this is not strictly speaking Translation but it isbetter than Translation (Cited in Horguelin 1996 80)

Indeed Perrot would write that his translation of Thucydides had brought his au-thor back from the dead in the form of a modern Frenchman this is somethingfor which Thucydides might well have been grateful On the contrary failing tochange the original sufficiently writes Perrot produces a ldquomonstrous bodyrdquo (corpsmonstreux cited in Venuti 1995 47)

Not everyonersquos arguments were as intelligently put as Perrotrsquos Pierre Perrin(c 1620ndash75) the so-called Abbeacute Perrin claimed that his 1648 translation of Virgilbrought Aeneas back as a French cavalier ldquodressed up with pomp and plume andbanglesrdquo (cited in Ladborough 1938 86)

There were a few detractors of this method mainly among philologists and whatwere called the traducteurs scrupuleux (as opposed to Perrot and the traducteurslibres) Among these Gilles Meacutenage (1613ndash92) is reported to have said that Perrotrsquostranslations were like a lady he had once known in Tours she had been belle butinfidegravele Since then the whole movement of elegant domesticating translation hasbeen known as ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

Many worlds

Unlike the French who saw French as the closest linguistic approximation to uni- versal values of reason and art seventeenth-century German scholars valorizedGerman for its very particularity and distinctiveness its German-ness JustusGeorg Schottel (1612ndash76) devotes a section of his Extensive work on the Germanlanguage (1663) to ldquoHow one should en-German (verteutschen)rdquomdashthis is charac-teristically an alternative German word for uumlbersetzen ldquotranslaterdquo

To achieve this [the improvement of German] the arts the scienceshistory and other realia should be dressed and become known in trulynatural German so that our language will not smell of un-GermanSpanish pride or Italian splendour gone stale or French pronunciation

and circumlocutions that are neither here nor there or of other thingsbut it will have its own short and euphonious German nature rich inmeaning and sense (Cited in Lefevere 1977 11)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 2: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 194

As Bridget OrsquoLaughlin wrote (1978 103) what is distinctive about the zebra is itsstripes but stripes are hardly the most important aspect of a zebrarsquos life

Yet what is most important to people themselves depends in part on their his-torical situation and their expectations these need not always be the same every-where at every time Existing in a situation of starvation and disease is not the wayany human being or any organism wishes to live But once you can eat and feedand protect your children then other factors come into play These factors may beconscious or close to consciousness or as in the case of the language one speaksthey may be largely unconscious And the record shows that these world-makingfactors can be extraordinarily diverse

This means that human values goals and conceptualizations are themselvesdiverse and maybe even incommensurable (Povinelli 2001) insofar as concep-tions differ lived worlds may be said to differ Probably the most blatant diversityis that of human languages this very diversity being one of the important lan-guage universals This is a simple fact the species speaks or has spoken thousandsof different mutually unintelligible languages How seriously should this diversitybe taken Some say not at all according to Noam Chomsky if a Martian arrivedon Earth and observed how children learn language he (in these parables it isalways a male Martian) would say that there is only one human language within Steven Pinkerrsquos oxymoron mutually unintelligible dialects (Pinker 1994 240)On the other side both George Steiner (1975) and Claude Hagegravege (1985) usethe same parable to opposite effect both say that if a Martian arrived on earthand observed human physical variation he would assume that there were maybea dozen human languagesmdashinstead of the five to ten thousand we actually find

(for discussion of the Martian parable paradox seeLeavitt 2011 5ndash6) Diversitygoes all the way up and down the levels of language structure from sound to thedividing of experience in lexicon to the directing of attention to one or anotheraspect of experience by pervasive grammatical categories to genres of discoursethe kinds of things one is expected to say and hear in a given society Both themusic and the meanings of languages are organized differently for each onemdashandagain there are thousands This gives the continuing impression through thegenerations that different languages convey different worlds (Sapir 1921 120ndash21Friedrich 1986 16)

The idea that ethnography is a kind of translation (Asad 1986 Rubel and Rosman

2003 and see the essays in this issue) has largely been treated metaphorically asan implication of the broader movement to see cultures as texts to be interpreted(Geertz 1973 Ricoeur 1973) Now (Hanks and Severi this issue) we are seeing anattempt to use the idea of translation as an alternative both to fixed cognitive uni-

versals and to an ontological pluralism of sealed worlds implying instead a focuson the processes of exchange and transfer not only between societies (ldquoculturesrdquo)but also between different social classes genders caste groupings within societieswhich in fact define all social interaction

There is however a risk here as there is in any analogy By extending the ideaof translation out of language into culture more broadly we weaken its force of sur-

prise Languages that are mutually unintelligible are absolutely so To recap RomanJakobsonrsquos functions of language (1960) when someone speaks say Turkishmdashone

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

195 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the approximately 9990 languages that I absolutely do not know2 I do not un-derstand a single word The referential function is missing or rather was neverthere A unilingual Turkish friend and I may be very phatic together over coffeeI may feel strong aspects of his expressivity he can be effectively conative in get-ting me to jump out of the way of an oncoming bus I may even sense some ofthe rhythm and alliteration if he recites a poem but as long as he keeps speakingTurkish there is no referential content unless the two of us start working hard andfor a long time on the metalinguistic functionmdashwhich is to say that we start learn-ing each otherrsquos languages

Note how different this is from what is called translating culture Since whatwe call culture includes virtually all aspects of life as soon as I arrive in again sayTurkey I think I recognize all kinds of things houses restaurants markets placesof worship men and women children and adults dressing somewhat differentlyfrom each other and occupying somewhat different roles I can immediately beginto form impressions on what might someday become ethnographies of the econo-my politics social organization religion We can call these translations and theyshare characteristics with interlingual translations But there is a precious opacityto languages that other human practices do not share or do not share so unavoid-ably Staying close to actual linguistic translation practice offers ethnographers asalutary reminder of how much in all aspects of a culture they do not understand

As against the model or metaphor of the text an alternative tradition of philol-ogy and ethnopoetics has opted rather for what we might call the metonym of thetext texts exist in cultures and in particular linguistic media In this view texts areseen not as ldquofragments of culturerdquo (Silverstein and Urban 1996 1) but as cultural

foci incomprehensible outside of their cultural and social situations and above allmade of language which is to say always a particular distinct languageThe fact of linguistic difference involves every level of language from the un-

translatability of phonetics and phonology (Webster 2014) to that of the universeof presuppositions out of which the source text arises with levels of lexicon andgrammatical architecture in between Moving from one language to another andtrying to have coherent ldquonormalrdquo texts in both must necessarily mean suppres-sions and additionsmdashwhat A L Becker (1995) following Ortega y Gasset callsdeficiencies and exuberances what John McDowell (2000) calls muting and add-ing Yet it seems to go without saying that modern Western translation whether

literary translation or the mass of ldquousefulrdquo that is business government and otherorganizational translation has as its central often its only goal to convey what areconsidered the necessary or useful aspects of the referential meaning of a text intoanother language

But producing such a usable text that is a normal-sounding or normal-readingtext in the target language (to use the rather frightening terminology of translationtheory) requires alterations of what was there in the source text even in its referen-tial meanings at every level of language The original is thinned out (deficiency) orelse one feels it has been thickened up with material that wasnrsquot there in the original(exuberance) This situation is all the more acute if we hope to convey not only the

2 I use the figure of ten thousand attested human languages The figure ranges from fiveto ten thousand depending on what is considered a language and what a dialect

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 196

referential sense but also something of the style and poetics of the original or itsrole in its own society (Silverstein 2003)

Sensitive or suspicious readers have long felt that this transmogrification in- volves loss or betrayal as is conveyed in the many derogatory aphorisms abouttranslation traduttore traditore ldquotranslator [=] traitorrdquo (a classic bit of metaprag-matics that illustrates itself in its patterned untranslatability) a translation is aldquophantom limbrdquo (Robinson 1996 [1997]) ldquoa translation is like a stewed strawberryrdquo(attributed to Harry de Forest Smith in Brower 1959 173) This last simile conveysboth the maintenance of something through translation and at the same time theloss of freshness that is of complexity and also evidently of structure But theconverse conveying all of the meanings carried in the source statement and onlythose requires creating a ldquomonstrosityrdquo (McDowell 2000) in the target languageIn this theoretical sense of full transference from one to another normal linguisticframe translation is impossible And yet in practice it is both possible and neces-sary In Franz Rosenzweigrsquos words ldquoTranslating means serving two masters It fol-lows that no one can do it But it follows also that it is like everything that no onecan do in theory everyonersquos task in practicerdquo (1926 [1994] 47)3

Given this reality ldquonormalrdquo ordinary translation what Jakobson (1959a) callsinterlingual translation or translation in the strict sense already carries a huge con-ceptual and cultural load any translation is a translation of cultures or worlds If wetake language diversity seriously at all then translators are on the front line theyare pilots traversing a relativistic linguistic universe

Here I will offer a brief run through some modern Western ideas about trans-lation highlighting what seem to me to be particularly acute formalizations and

propose a radical view of translation that seems particularly suited to anthropolo-gists Going over this material seems important for an anthropological audiencethe history of translation theory in the West parallels that of anthropology as a his-tory of attitudes toward other ways of saying and thinking4

The following part of the paper will explore a single example drawn from aritual performance carried out in the Central Himalayas of northern India

Renaissance diversity

From the sixteenth century over a relatively short time the Western Europeanworld based on an agricultural economy a fixed hierarchical social organizationand concomitant ideology and the cultural dominance of Latin was transformed

3 ldquoUumlbersetzen heiszligt zwei Herren dienen Also kann es Niemand Also ist es wie alleswas theoretisch besehen niemand kann praktisch jedermanns Aufgaberdquo Cf Sapirrsquosstatements that two languages could be incommensurable while it was clear that henever questioned the possibility of translation To be incommensurable means to beoperating with different coordinate systems While ultimate and exact congruence can-not be achieved in this situation one can find equivalences that will serve all practicalpurposes (Leavitt 2011 136ndash38)

4 For histories from within translation studies see Berman ([1984] 1992) Venuti (1995)Bassnett (2014)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

197 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

The feudal economy and social order were being replaced by an expanding capital-ism nation-states were on the rise with the valorization of state vernacular languag-es against Latin Western societies were conquering and colonizing whole sectionsof the globe setting up a world political-economic system New philosophical sys-tems and experimental sciences were coming into being and the great political-ideological structure of the church was being challenged from within For manyscholars of the century new worlds in many senses of the word were opening upOne focus of debate was the relative value of vernacular languages versus Latinand Greek another was the accessibility of both scientific and biblical truth to themasses of people and much of the discussion turned on questions of translation

The dominant medieval view had been that the diversity of languages was acurse Godrsquos punishment for the human pride manifested in the construction ofthe Tower of Babel Both Protestant reformers in the center and north of Europeand Catholic language activists in France and Italy challenged this view and sawlanguage diversity either as a positive good or as a problem that could be handledthrough translation I will begin with the better-known Protestant theories butdevote more time to Italian views of diversity since I presume that these are lessfamiliar to anthropologists

Translation for some Reformation thinkers such as John Calvin (1509ndash64)at least allowed some mitigation of the curse of Babel What one could translatewas the meaning the sense of the text and this could be conveyed in vernaculartongues as well as in classical ones The question of whether and how to translateHoly Writ into vernacular languages became a central religious and political de-bate one of the central issues of the Reformation With the Bible translations of the

sixteenth century translation itself came to be an essential part of a double goalto reveal the referential meaning of Holy Writ to anyone who could read the ver-nacular thus dispossessing the clergy of their monopoly on sacred texts and at thesame time to valorize the vernacular itself as a national tongue since a part of theProtestant argument was for national churches headed in each case by the secularhead of the country not by the pope

In Protestant translation practice what is important is not the particular formof the language but that the referential meaning be conveyed in a colloquial ver-nacular that Everyman can understand This view was expressed clearly by Lutherthe goal is ldquoto produce clear language comprehensible to everyone with an un-

distorted sense and meaningrdquo (ldquoPreface to the Book of Jobrdquo cited in Rosenzweig[1926] 1994 48) ldquoin speech the meaning and subject matter must be considerednot the grammar for the grammar shall not rule over the meaningrdquo (ldquoTranslatorrsquosletterrdquo 1530 cited in Bassnett 2014 59) This view has continued to inspire Prot-estant translation theory up to this day notably that of the Summer Institute ofLinguistics true conversion requires that Godrsquos Word be accessible in the speakerrsquosown language (see eg Handman 2007)

In Italy parallel issues arose around the Questione della lingua what languageshould serve as the cultural cement for Italy now thought of as at least a potentialnational entity in spite of its political fragmentation Here the basic argument was

that the multiplicity of vernaculars was an aspect of the diversity of the world in it-self a good thing an expression of Godrsquos infinite creative power As Claude-GilbertDubois puts it about this period in Italy and in a France heavily influenced by

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 198

Italian thinking we ldquowitness a kind of ennobling of the multiple Multiplicationis not corruption but fecundityrdquo (1970 119)

This is an enormous shift from the medieval view of an ordered hierarchy itis no longer easy to tell what is superior and what is inferior In the words of theFlorentine humanist Benedetto Varchi (1503ndash65) ldquoIn the universe there must exist all the things that can exist and nothing is so small or so ugly (tanto picciolanegrave cosigrave laida) that it does not contribute and add to the perfection of the universerdquo(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 181) If even the smallest and ugliest thing adds to theperfection of the universe this implies a fundamental incommensurability insteadof a clear hierarchy perfection is an infinite scatter And this refusal of hierarchyapplies to languages as well one cannot assert the superiority of some languagesover others In his Dialogo delle lingue ([1542] 2009 35) the Paduan humanistSperone Speroni (1500ndash1588) has his mouthpiece assert ldquoI hold it certain that thelanguages of every country such as the Arabic and the Indian like the Roman andthe Athenian are of equal valuerdquo

The implication of this argument is then to challenge the Babel story and saythat the multiplicity and diversity of languages is neither a curse nor a mere felixculpa but a positive good a gift from God This was said explicitly by the Sienesehumanist Claudio Tolomei (1492ndash1556) ldquoFecund nature (la feconda natura) didnot accept that there should be a single form of speech in this great and variededifice of the worldrdquo (1531 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 180) Varchi for his partconcludes ldquoI say that nature could not and indeed perhaps should not have madea single language for the whole worldrdquo (cited in Demonet 1992 513)

Edward Stankiewicz sums up the views of this period ldquoOne of the central no-

tions in this program is the recognition that each of the individual living languag-es has a place in the overall scheme of things and that each of them is endowedwith linguistic properties which make up its distinctive character or lsquogeniusrsquordquo(1981 180)

The second part of this statement raises the notion of the distinctiveness of eachlanguage Languages are not only valuable but their value lies in their differing spe-cifics the distinctive character or genius of each one Dubois (1970 119) makes anexplicit link between the diversity of words and the new idea of an infinite pluralityof distinct worlds proposed by Giordano Bruno later in the century ldquoThe pluralityof languages like the plurality of worlds invented by Giordano Bruno during the

same period demonstrates the immense richness of the spiritrdquoBut the evocation of Bruno (1548ndash1600) raises a different point We have seenthat for Luther and for Reformation Bible translators generally what mattered wasa clear conveyance of referential meaningmdashprecisely not the exploitation of thespecific riches of each language Brunorsquos own defense of translation was based ona similar view of philosophical and what we would call scientific discourse Brunosaid that it was perfectly all right to read Aristotle in an Italian translation ratherthan the original Greek in that either of these permitted the reader to test Aristotlersquostheories empirically and so recognize Aristotlersquos errors Scientific knowledge wasbased not on the ldquopedantryrdquo of knowing Greek and Latin not on the word but on

knowledge of the worldUnlike the Bible translators the Italian theorists went on to justify a differentside of language use from that of either Scripture or science in literary and poetic

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

199 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

discourse the unique genius of each language comes into fruition as a form of so-cial play The Florentine shoemaker-sage Giovan Battista Gelli (1498ndash1563) writesthat ldquoevery language has its particularities and its caprices (capresterie)rdquo ([1551]1976 201ndash2) Varchi writes that Florentine has a ldquocertain peculiar or special orparticular property as do all other languagesrdquo and boasts of ldquocertain qualities andcapricious turns (certe proprietagrave e capestrerie) in which the Florentine languageaboundsrdquo And these turns are particularly apparent in everyday popular discourse(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182ndash83) Language cannot be encompassed in a definiteset of rules according to Varchi because the rational faculty is incapable of captur-ing the expressive power of language in everyday speech ldquoReason should prevailand win in all matters except in language where if reason is contrary to usage orusage to reason it is usage not reason which must always take precedencerdquo (citedin ibid 183)

The most famous phrasing of this distinctive quality was in Joachim du Bellayrsquos1549 Deffense et illustration de la langue franccediloyse Most of this text is a translationfrom Speronirsquos Dialogo but it is du Bellay who specifies that each language pos-sesses a certain je ne scais quoy propremdashand he makes this point as part of a discus-sion of the difficulties of translation as indeed do a number of Italian authors Eachlanguage has its own force and beauty ( forze e bellezza) which cannot be carriedover into another tongue Gelli ([1551] 1976 201) writes ldquoThey say that discourses(cose) that are translated from one language into another never have the same forceor beauty that they had in their own To say things in one language in the styleof another has no grace at allrdquo

Repeatedly the discussion of the distinctiveness of each language is part of the

discussion of the difficulties of translation The examples used are usually liter-ary ones Homer Virgil and Dante or Petrarchmdashand notably not Aristotlemdashnoneof whose work can be translated without losing its most important quality thedistinctive beauty of each We find the example in the De subtilitate (1550) of theperipatetic mathematician-physician Girolamo Cardano (1501ndash76)

The utility of the diversity of languages is that they can thereby expressall the affects of the soul The proof is that one cannot express Homerrsquossentences in Latin or in our mother tongue nor Virgil in Greek or in ourmother tongue and even less the poems of Francesco Petrarch in Latinor Greek (Cited in Dubois 1970 118)

Implicit in the discussion is a distinction between two goals of discourse thatof conveying information and that of projecting the force and beauty of a lan-guagemdashto use anachronistic terms between the referential and poetic functionsof language Translations from any language into any language can convey whatwe could call referential meaning but fail to convey play capresterie the force andbeauty deriving from specific circumstances of social life The distinction is cen-tral for Bruno and Gelli writes ldquoI know that translation is done for the sake ofsciences and not to display the power and beauty of languagesrdquo ([1551] 1976202 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182) The formal distinction of the two modes wasmade by Sir Francis Bacon (1561ndash1626) between literary grammar which dealswith languages and which cannot really render the je ne scai quoy of each languagein translation and philosophical grammar which deals with ldquothe analogy between

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 200

words and things or reasonrdquo (Huumlllen 2001 213) and is in fact adequate for theadvancement of learning

Already then different goals of translation were being distinguished in the sev-enteenth century For Protestants the Sacred Scripture plays the role of sciencefor Gelli or Bruno in both cases the goal is to convey clear meanings that are ofimmediate spiritual or secular use But both presume the possibility of anotherattitude one that fully recognizes the genius of each language This possibility isdeveloped above all by the Italians with their recognition that linguistic worlds areconstructed by bringing out the possibilities of each language in social interactionand in play

ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

By the early 1600s the French language and French style were dominating EuropeAlready in the previous century French discussion of translation had tended tobe nationalistic and notably contrasted the ldquodirect orderrdquo of the French sentence(SubjectndashVerbndashObject with adjectives coming for the most part after the noun)with the horrid mixup of Latin word order With the rise of Cartesian rationalismthe assumption came to be strongly reinforced that all human beings think in thesame way languages being a mere means of external formulation and communica-tion When Descartes himself was challenged (by Hobbes) as to whether what hecalled reason could really be merely a local way of linking words he replied ldquoWhodoubts that a Frenchman and a German can have the same thoughts or reasonings

about the same things despite the fact that the words they think of are complete-ly differentrdquo (Descartes 1984 II 125ndash26) In 1669 Descartesrsquo follower Louis LeLaboureur claimed that since everyone in the world thought in the direct order ofFrench the Romans too must have conceived their sentences in French then addeda step to scramble the syntax before speaking or writing

This basic position as well as a strong sense of cultural self-sufficiency mo-tivated French translation theory The argument was that the translator shouldreproduce not just the words of the text but also the effect it had on its originalreaders Since the text was not exotic or strange-sounding for its intended publicwe should translate it in a way that is not disturbing for our public If this requires

changing meanings so be it such changes will in fact often be an improvementon what are sometimes needlessly repetitive longwinded incoherent or indeli-cate originals And this applies equally to scientific religious and literary worksIn the words of the great translator of the century Nicolas Perrot drsquoAblancourt(1606ndash64)

It would be a Judaic superstition to attach oneself to the words andabandon the design for which they were used It is only rendering halfof an Author if one cuts off his eloquence As he was agreeable in his ownlanguage he should be so in ours as well and insofar as the beauties andgraces of the two are different we should not hesitate to give him those

of our own country since we are removing his Otherwise we would bemaking an ugly (meschante) copy of an admirable original (1638 citedin Horguelin 1996 76)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

201 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

When Perrotrsquos translation of Tacitusmdashin which he says he sought ldquoto look not somuch to what [the author] said as to what he should say ldquo (cited in ibid 78)mdashcameout during the 1640s the general opinion was that it was a great improvement onthe original But a more extreme statement accompanies his 1654 translation ofthe quite scatological Greek satirist Lucian of Samosata Plainly there is plenty inLucian that would shock seventeenth-century French sensibilities

It was necessary to change all this to make something agreeableotherwise it would not have been Lucian For this reason I do notalways attach myself to the words or the ideas of this Author andmaintaining his goal I arrange things to our air and our style Differenttimes require not only different words but different thoughts and it isthe custom of Ambassadors to dress in the fashion of the land to whichthey have been sent for fear of appearing ridiculous to those they aimto please It is true that this is not strictly speaking Translation but it isbetter than Translation (Cited in Horguelin 1996 80)

Indeed Perrot would write that his translation of Thucydides had brought his au-thor back from the dead in the form of a modern Frenchman this is somethingfor which Thucydides might well have been grateful On the contrary failing tochange the original sufficiently writes Perrot produces a ldquomonstrous bodyrdquo (corpsmonstreux cited in Venuti 1995 47)

Not everyonersquos arguments were as intelligently put as Perrotrsquos Pierre Perrin(c 1620ndash75) the so-called Abbeacute Perrin claimed that his 1648 translation of Virgilbrought Aeneas back as a French cavalier ldquodressed up with pomp and plume andbanglesrdquo (cited in Ladborough 1938 86)

There were a few detractors of this method mainly among philologists and whatwere called the traducteurs scrupuleux (as opposed to Perrot and the traducteurslibres) Among these Gilles Meacutenage (1613ndash92) is reported to have said that Perrotrsquostranslations were like a lady he had once known in Tours she had been belle butinfidegravele Since then the whole movement of elegant domesticating translation hasbeen known as ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

Many worlds

Unlike the French who saw French as the closest linguistic approximation to uni- versal values of reason and art seventeenth-century German scholars valorizedGerman for its very particularity and distinctiveness its German-ness JustusGeorg Schottel (1612ndash76) devotes a section of his Extensive work on the Germanlanguage (1663) to ldquoHow one should en-German (verteutschen)rdquomdashthis is charac-teristically an alternative German word for uumlbersetzen ldquotranslaterdquo

To achieve this [the improvement of German] the arts the scienceshistory and other realia should be dressed and become known in trulynatural German so that our language will not smell of un-GermanSpanish pride or Italian splendour gone stale or French pronunciation

and circumlocutions that are neither here nor there or of other thingsbut it will have its own short and euphonious German nature rich inmeaning and sense (Cited in Lefevere 1977 11)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 3: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

195 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the approximately 9990 languages that I absolutely do not know2 I do not un-derstand a single word The referential function is missing or rather was neverthere A unilingual Turkish friend and I may be very phatic together over coffeeI may feel strong aspects of his expressivity he can be effectively conative in get-ting me to jump out of the way of an oncoming bus I may even sense some ofthe rhythm and alliteration if he recites a poem but as long as he keeps speakingTurkish there is no referential content unless the two of us start working hard andfor a long time on the metalinguistic functionmdashwhich is to say that we start learn-ing each otherrsquos languages

Note how different this is from what is called translating culture Since whatwe call culture includes virtually all aspects of life as soon as I arrive in again sayTurkey I think I recognize all kinds of things houses restaurants markets placesof worship men and women children and adults dressing somewhat differentlyfrom each other and occupying somewhat different roles I can immediately beginto form impressions on what might someday become ethnographies of the econo-my politics social organization religion We can call these translations and theyshare characteristics with interlingual translations But there is a precious opacityto languages that other human practices do not share or do not share so unavoid-ably Staying close to actual linguistic translation practice offers ethnographers asalutary reminder of how much in all aspects of a culture they do not understand

As against the model or metaphor of the text an alternative tradition of philol-ogy and ethnopoetics has opted rather for what we might call the metonym of thetext texts exist in cultures and in particular linguistic media In this view texts areseen not as ldquofragments of culturerdquo (Silverstein and Urban 1996 1) but as cultural

foci incomprehensible outside of their cultural and social situations and above allmade of language which is to say always a particular distinct languageThe fact of linguistic difference involves every level of language from the un-

translatability of phonetics and phonology (Webster 2014) to that of the universeof presuppositions out of which the source text arises with levels of lexicon andgrammatical architecture in between Moving from one language to another andtrying to have coherent ldquonormalrdquo texts in both must necessarily mean suppres-sions and additionsmdashwhat A L Becker (1995) following Ortega y Gasset callsdeficiencies and exuberances what John McDowell (2000) calls muting and add-ing Yet it seems to go without saying that modern Western translation whether

literary translation or the mass of ldquousefulrdquo that is business government and otherorganizational translation has as its central often its only goal to convey what areconsidered the necessary or useful aspects of the referential meaning of a text intoanother language

But producing such a usable text that is a normal-sounding or normal-readingtext in the target language (to use the rather frightening terminology of translationtheory) requires alterations of what was there in the source text even in its referen-tial meanings at every level of language The original is thinned out (deficiency) orelse one feels it has been thickened up with material that wasnrsquot there in the original(exuberance) This situation is all the more acute if we hope to convey not only the

2 I use the figure of ten thousand attested human languages The figure ranges from fiveto ten thousand depending on what is considered a language and what a dialect

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 196

referential sense but also something of the style and poetics of the original or itsrole in its own society (Silverstein 2003)

Sensitive or suspicious readers have long felt that this transmogrification in- volves loss or betrayal as is conveyed in the many derogatory aphorisms abouttranslation traduttore traditore ldquotranslator [=] traitorrdquo (a classic bit of metaprag-matics that illustrates itself in its patterned untranslatability) a translation is aldquophantom limbrdquo (Robinson 1996 [1997]) ldquoa translation is like a stewed strawberryrdquo(attributed to Harry de Forest Smith in Brower 1959 173) This last simile conveysboth the maintenance of something through translation and at the same time theloss of freshness that is of complexity and also evidently of structure But theconverse conveying all of the meanings carried in the source statement and onlythose requires creating a ldquomonstrosityrdquo (McDowell 2000) in the target languageIn this theoretical sense of full transference from one to another normal linguisticframe translation is impossible And yet in practice it is both possible and neces-sary In Franz Rosenzweigrsquos words ldquoTranslating means serving two masters It fol-lows that no one can do it But it follows also that it is like everything that no onecan do in theory everyonersquos task in practicerdquo (1926 [1994] 47)3

Given this reality ldquonormalrdquo ordinary translation what Jakobson (1959a) callsinterlingual translation or translation in the strict sense already carries a huge con-ceptual and cultural load any translation is a translation of cultures or worlds If wetake language diversity seriously at all then translators are on the front line theyare pilots traversing a relativistic linguistic universe

Here I will offer a brief run through some modern Western ideas about trans-lation highlighting what seem to me to be particularly acute formalizations and

propose a radical view of translation that seems particularly suited to anthropolo-gists Going over this material seems important for an anthropological audiencethe history of translation theory in the West parallels that of anthropology as a his-tory of attitudes toward other ways of saying and thinking4

The following part of the paper will explore a single example drawn from aritual performance carried out in the Central Himalayas of northern India

Renaissance diversity

From the sixteenth century over a relatively short time the Western Europeanworld based on an agricultural economy a fixed hierarchical social organizationand concomitant ideology and the cultural dominance of Latin was transformed

3 ldquoUumlbersetzen heiszligt zwei Herren dienen Also kann es Niemand Also ist es wie alleswas theoretisch besehen niemand kann praktisch jedermanns Aufgaberdquo Cf Sapirrsquosstatements that two languages could be incommensurable while it was clear that henever questioned the possibility of translation To be incommensurable means to beoperating with different coordinate systems While ultimate and exact congruence can-not be achieved in this situation one can find equivalences that will serve all practicalpurposes (Leavitt 2011 136ndash38)

4 For histories from within translation studies see Berman ([1984] 1992) Venuti (1995)Bassnett (2014)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

197 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

The feudal economy and social order were being replaced by an expanding capital-ism nation-states were on the rise with the valorization of state vernacular languag-es against Latin Western societies were conquering and colonizing whole sectionsof the globe setting up a world political-economic system New philosophical sys-tems and experimental sciences were coming into being and the great political-ideological structure of the church was being challenged from within For manyscholars of the century new worlds in many senses of the word were opening upOne focus of debate was the relative value of vernacular languages versus Latinand Greek another was the accessibility of both scientific and biblical truth to themasses of people and much of the discussion turned on questions of translation

The dominant medieval view had been that the diversity of languages was acurse Godrsquos punishment for the human pride manifested in the construction ofthe Tower of Babel Both Protestant reformers in the center and north of Europeand Catholic language activists in France and Italy challenged this view and sawlanguage diversity either as a positive good or as a problem that could be handledthrough translation I will begin with the better-known Protestant theories butdevote more time to Italian views of diversity since I presume that these are lessfamiliar to anthropologists

Translation for some Reformation thinkers such as John Calvin (1509ndash64)at least allowed some mitigation of the curse of Babel What one could translatewas the meaning the sense of the text and this could be conveyed in vernaculartongues as well as in classical ones The question of whether and how to translateHoly Writ into vernacular languages became a central religious and political de-bate one of the central issues of the Reformation With the Bible translations of the

sixteenth century translation itself came to be an essential part of a double goalto reveal the referential meaning of Holy Writ to anyone who could read the ver-nacular thus dispossessing the clergy of their monopoly on sacred texts and at thesame time to valorize the vernacular itself as a national tongue since a part of theProtestant argument was for national churches headed in each case by the secularhead of the country not by the pope

In Protestant translation practice what is important is not the particular formof the language but that the referential meaning be conveyed in a colloquial ver-nacular that Everyman can understand This view was expressed clearly by Lutherthe goal is ldquoto produce clear language comprehensible to everyone with an un-

distorted sense and meaningrdquo (ldquoPreface to the Book of Jobrdquo cited in Rosenzweig[1926] 1994 48) ldquoin speech the meaning and subject matter must be considerednot the grammar for the grammar shall not rule over the meaningrdquo (ldquoTranslatorrsquosletterrdquo 1530 cited in Bassnett 2014 59) This view has continued to inspire Prot-estant translation theory up to this day notably that of the Summer Institute ofLinguistics true conversion requires that Godrsquos Word be accessible in the speakerrsquosown language (see eg Handman 2007)

In Italy parallel issues arose around the Questione della lingua what languageshould serve as the cultural cement for Italy now thought of as at least a potentialnational entity in spite of its political fragmentation Here the basic argument was

that the multiplicity of vernaculars was an aspect of the diversity of the world in it-self a good thing an expression of Godrsquos infinite creative power As Claude-GilbertDubois puts it about this period in Italy and in a France heavily influenced by

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 198

Italian thinking we ldquowitness a kind of ennobling of the multiple Multiplicationis not corruption but fecundityrdquo (1970 119)

This is an enormous shift from the medieval view of an ordered hierarchy itis no longer easy to tell what is superior and what is inferior In the words of theFlorentine humanist Benedetto Varchi (1503ndash65) ldquoIn the universe there must exist all the things that can exist and nothing is so small or so ugly (tanto picciolanegrave cosigrave laida) that it does not contribute and add to the perfection of the universerdquo(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 181) If even the smallest and ugliest thing adds to theperfection of the universe this implies a fundamental incommensurability insteadof a clear hierarchy perfection is an infinite scatter And this refusal of hierarchyapplies to languages as well one cannot assert the superiority of some languagesover others In his Dialogo delle lingue ([1542] 2009 35) the Paduan humanistSperone Speroni (1500ndash1588) has his mouthpiece assert ldquoI hold it certain that thelanguages of every country such as the Arabic and the Indian like the Roman andthe Athenian are of equal valuerdquo

The implication of this argument is then to challenge the Babel story and saythat the multiplicity and diversity of languages is neither a curse nor a mere felixculpa but a positive good a gift from God This was said explicitly by the Sienesehumanist Claudio Tolomei (1492ndash1556) ldquoFecund nature (la feconda natura) didnot accept that there should be a single form of speech in this great and variededifice of the worldrdquo (1531 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 180) Varchi for his partconcludes ldquoI say that nature could not and indeed perhaps should not have madea single language for the whole worldrdquo (cited in Demonet 1992 513)

Edward Stankiewicz sums up the views of this period ldquoOne of the central no-

tions in this program is the recognition that each of the individual living languag-es has a place in the overall scheme of things and that each of them is endowedwith linguistic properties which make up its distinctive character or lsquogeniusrsquordquo(1981 180)

The second part of this statement raises the notion of the distinctiveness of eachlanguage Languages are not only valuable but their value lies in their differing spe-cifics the distinctive character or genius of each one Dubois (1970 119) makes anexplicit link between the diversity of words and the new idea of an infinite pluralityof distinct worlds proposed by Giordano Bruno later in the century ldquoThe pluralityof languages like the plurality of worlds invented by Giordano Bruno during the

same period demonstrates the immense richness of the spiritrdquoBut the evocation of Bruno (1548ndash1600) raises a different point We have seenthat for Luther and for Reformation Bible translators generally what mattered wasa clear conveyance of referential meaningmdashprecisely not the exploitation of thespecific riches of each language Brunorsquos own defense of translation was based ona similar view of philosophical and what we would call scientific discourse Brunosaid that it was perfectly all right to read Aristotle in an Italian translation ratherthan the original Greek in that either of these permitted the reader to test Aristotlersquostheories empirically and so recognize Aristotlersquos errors Scientific knowledge wasbased not on the ldquopedantryrdquo of knowing Greek and Latin not on the word but on

knowledge of the worldUnlike the Bible translators the Italian theorists went on to justify a differentside of language use from that of either Scripture or science in literary and poetic

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

199 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

discourse the unique genius of each language comes into fruition as a form of so-cial play The Florentine shoemaker-sage Giovan Battista Gelli (1498ndash1563) writesthat ldquoevery language has its particularities and its caprices (capresterie)rdquo ([1551]1976 201ndash2) Varchi writes that Florentine has a ldquocertain peculiar or special orparticular property as do all other languagesrdquo and boasts of ldquocertain qualities andcapricious turns (certe proprietagrave e capestrerie) in which the Florentine languageaboundsrdquo And these turns are particularly apparent in everyday popular discourse(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182ndash83) Language cannot be encompassed in a definiteset of rules according to Varchi because the rational faculty is incapable of captur-ing the expressive power of language in everyday speech ldquoReason should prevailand win in all matters except in language where if reason is contrary to usage orusage to reason it is usage not reason which must always take precedencerdquo (citedin ibid 183)

The most famous phrasing of this distinctive quality was in Joachim du Bellayrsquos1549 Deffense et illustration de la langue franccediloyse Most of this text is a translationfrom Speronirsquos Dialogo but it is du Bellay who specifies that each language pos-sesses a certain je ne scais quoy propremdashand he makes this point as part of a discus-sion of the difficulties of translation as indeed do a number of Italian authors Eachlanguage has its own force and beauty ( forze e bellezza) which cannot be carriedover into another tongue Gelli ([1551] 1976 201) writes ldquoThey say that discourses(cose) that are translated from one language into another never have the same forceor beauty that they had in their own To say things in one language in the styleof another has no grace at allrdquo

Repeatedly the discussion of the distinctiveness of each language is part of the

discussion of the difficulties of translation The examples used are usually liter-ary ones Homer Virgil and Dante or Petrarchmdashand notably not Aristotlemdashnoneof whose work can be translated without losing its most important quality thedistinctive beauty of each We find the example in the De subtilitate (1550) of theperipatetic mathematician-physician Girolamo Cardano (1501ndash76)

The utility of the diversity of languages is that they can thereby expressall the affects of the soul The proof is that one cannot express Homerrsquossentences in Latin or in our mother tongue nor Virgil in Greek or in ourmother tongue and even less the poems of Francesco Petrarch in Latinor Greek (Cited in Dubois 1970 118)

Implicit in the discussion is a distinction between two goals of discourse thatof conveying information and that of projecting the force and beauty of a lan-guagemdashto use anachronistic terms between the referential and poetic functionsof language Translations from any language into any language can convey whatwe could call referential meaning but fail to convey play capresterie the force andbeauty deriving from specific circumstances of social life The distinction is cen-tral for Bruno and Gelli writes ldquoI know that translation is done for the sake ofsciences and not to display the power and beauty of languagesrdquo ([1551] 1976202 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182) The formal distinction of the two modes wasmade by Sir Francis Bacon (1561ndash1626) between literary grammar which dealswith languages and which cannot really render the je ne scai quoy of each languagein translation and philosophical grammar which deals with ldquothe analogy between

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 200

words and things or reasonrdquo (Huumlllen 2001 213) and is in fact adequate for theadvancement of learning

Already then different goals of translation were being distinguished in the sev-enteenth century For Protestants the Sacred Scripture plays the role of sciencefor Gelli or Bruno in both cases the goal is to convey clear meanings that are ofimmediate spiritual or secular use But both presume the possibility of anotherattitude one that fully recognizes the genius of each language This possibility isdeveloped above all by the Italians with their recognition that linguistic worlds areconstructed by bringing out the possibilities of each language in social interactionand in play

ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

By the early 1600s the French language and French style were dominating EuropeAlready in the previous century French discussion of translation had tended tobe nationalistic and notably contrasted the ldquodirect orderrdquo of the French sentence(SubjectndashVerbndashObject with adjectives coming for the most part after the noun)with the horrid mixup of Latin word order With the rise of Cartesian rationalismthe assumption came to be strongly reinforced that all human beings think in thesame way languages being a mere means of external formulation and communica-tion When Descartes himself was challenged (by Hobbes) as to whether what hecalled reason could really be merely a local way of linking words he replied ldquoWhodoubts that a Frenchman and a German can have the same thoughts or reasonings

about the same things despite the fact that the words they think of are complete-ly differentrdquo (Descartes 1984 II 125ndash26) In 1669 Descartesrsquo follower Louis LeLaboureur claimed that since everyone in the world thought in the direct order ofFrench the Romans too must have conceived their sentences in French then addeda step to scramble the syntax before speaking or writing

This basic position as well as a strong sense of cultural self-sufficiency mo-tivated French translation theory The argument was that the translator shouldreproduce not just the words of the text but also the effect it had on its originalreaders Since the text was not exotic or strange-sounding for its intended publicwe should translate it in a way that is not disturbing for our public If this requires

changing meanings so be it such changes will in fact often be an improvementon what are sometimes needlessly repetitive longwinded incoherent or indeli-cate originals And this applies equally to scientific religious and literary worksIn the words of the great translator of the century Nicolas Perrot drsquoAblancourt(1606ndash64)

It would be a Judaic superstition to attach oneself to the words andabandon the design for which they were used It is only rendering halfof an Author if one cuts off his eloquence As he was agreeable in his ownlanguage he should be so in ours as well and insofar as the beauties andgraces of the two are different we should not hesitate to give him those

of our own country since we are removing his Otherwise we would bemaking an ugly (meschante) copy of an admirable original (1638 citedin Horguelin 1996 76)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

201 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

When Perrotrsquos translation of Tacitusmdashin which he says he sought ldquoto look not somuch to what [the author] said as to what he should say ldquo (cited in ibid 78)mdashcameout during the 1640s the general opinion was that it was a great improvement onthe original But a more extreme statement accompanies his 1654 translation ofthe quite scatological Greek satirist Lucian of Samosata Plainly there is plenty inLucian that would shock seventeenth-century French sensibilities

It was necessary to change all this to make something agreeableotherwise it would not have been Lucian For this reason I do notalways attach myself to the words or the ideas of this Author andmaintaining his goal I arrange things to our air and our style Differenttimes require not only different words but different thoughts and it isthe custom of Ambassadors to dress in the fashion of the land to whichthey have been sent for fear of appearing ridiculous to those they aimto please It is true that this is not strictly speaking Translation but it isbetter than Translation (Cited in Horguelin 1996 80)

Indeed Perrot would write that his translation of Thucydides had brought his au-thor back from the dead in the form of a modern Frenchman this is somethingfor which Thucydides might well have been grateful On the contrary failing tochange the original sufficiently writes Perrot produces a ldquomonstrous bodyrdquo (corpsmonstreux cited in Venuti 1995 47)

Not everyonersquos arguments were as intelligently put as Perrotrsquos Pierre Perrin(c 1620ndash75) the so-called Abbeacute Perrin claimed that his 1648 translation of Virgilbrought Aeneas back as a French cavalier ldquodressed up with pomp and plume andbanglesrdquo (cited in Ladborough 1938 86)

There were a few detractors of this method mainly among philologists and whatwere called the traducteurs scrupuleux (as opposed to Perrot and the traducteurslibres) Among these Gilles Meacutenage (1613ndash92) is reported to have said that Perrotrsquostranslations were like a lady he had once known in Tours she had been belle butinfidegravele Since then the whole movement of elegant domesticating translation hasbeen known as ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

Many worlds

Unlike the French who saw French as the closest linguistic approximation to uni- versal values of reason and art seventeenth-century German scholars valorizedGerman for its very particularity and distinctiveness its German-ness JustusGeorg Schottel (1612ndash76) devotes a section of his Extensive work on the Germanlanguage (1663) to ldquoHow one should en-German (verteutschen)rdquomdashthis is charac-teristically an alternative German word for uumlbersetzen ldquotranslaterdquo

To achieve this [the improvement of German] the arts the scienceshistory and other realia should be dressed and become known in trulynatural German so that our language will not smell of un-GermanSpanish pride or Italian splendour gone stale or French pronunciation

and circumlocutions that are neither here nor there or of other thingsbut it will have its own short and euphonious German nature rich inmeaning and sense (Cited in Lefevere 1977 11)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 4: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 196

referential sense but also something of the style and poetics of the original or itsrole in its own society (Silverstein 2003)

Sensitive or suspicious readers have long felt that this transmogrification in- volves loss or betrayal as is conveyed in the many derogatory aphorisms abouttranslation traduttore traditore ldquotranslator [=] traitorrdquo (a classic bit of metaprag-matics that illustrates itself in its patterned untranslatability) a translation is aldquophantom limbrdquo (Robinson 1996 [1997]) ldquoa translation is like a stewed strawberryrdquo(attributed to Harry de Forest Smith in Brower 1959 173) This last simile conveysboth the maintenance of something through translation and at the same time theloss of freshness that is of complexity and also evidently of structure But theconverse conveying all of the meanings carried in the source statement and onlythose requires creating a ldquomonstrosityrdquo (McDowell 2000) in the target languageIn this theoretical sense of full transference from one to another normal linguisticframe translation is impossible And yet in practice it is both possible and neces-sary In Franz Rosenzweigrsquos words ldquoTranslating means serving two masters It fol-lows that no one can do it But it follows also that it is like everything that no onecan do in theory everyonersquos task in practicerdquo (1926 [1994] 47)3

Given this reality ldquonormalrdquo ordinary translation what Jakobson (1959a) callsinterlingual translation or translation in the strict sense already carries a huge con-ceptual and cultural load any translation is a translation of cultures or worlds If wetake language diversity seriously at all then translators are on the front line theyare pilots traversing a relativistic linguistic universe

Here I will offer a brief run through some modern Western ideas about trans-lation highlighting what seem to me to be particularly acute formalizations and

propose a radical view of translation that seems particularly suited to anthropolo-gists Going over this material seems important for an anthropological audiencethe history of translation theory in the West parallels that of anthropology as a his-tory of attitudes toward other ways of saying and thinking4

The following part of the paper will explore a single example drawn from aritual performance carried out in the Central Himalayas of northern India

Renaissance diversity

From the sixteenth century over a relatively short time the Western Europeanworld based on an agricultural economy a fixed hierarchical social organizationand concomitant ideology and the cultural dominance of Latin was transformed

3 ldquoUumlbersetzen heiszligt zwei Herren dienen Also kann es Niemand Also ist es wie alleswas theoretisch besehen niemand kann praktisch jedermanns Aufgaberdquo Cf Sapirrsquosstatements that two languages could be incommensurable while it was clear that henever questioned the possibility of translation To be incommensurable means to beoperating with different coordinate systems While ultimate and exact congruence can-not be achieved in this situation one can find equivalences that will serve all practicalpurposes (Leavitt 2011 136ndash38)

4 For histories from within translation studies see Berman ([1984] 1992) Venuti (1995)Bassnett (2014)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

197 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

The feudal economy and social order were being replaced by an expanding capital-ism nation-states were on the rise with the valorization of state vernacular languag-es against Latin Western societies were conquering and colonizing whole sectionsof the globe setting up a world political-economic system New philosophical sys-tems and experimental sciences were coming into being and the great political-ideological structure of the church was being challenged from within For manyscholars of the century new worlds in many senses of the word were opening upOne focus of debate was the relative value of vernacular languages versus Latinand Greek another was the accessibility of both scientific and biblical truth to themasses of people and much of the discussion turned on questions of translation

The dominant medieval view had been that the diversity of languages was acurse Godrsquos punishment for the human pride manifested in the construction ofthe Tower of Babel Both Protestant reformers in the center and north of Europeand Catholic language activists in France and Italy challenged this view and sawlanguage diversity either as a positive good or as a problem that could be handledthrough translation I will begin with the better-known Protestant theories butdevote more time to Italian views of diversity since I presume that these are lessfamiliar to anthropologists

Translation for some Reformation thinkers such as John Calvin (1509ndash64)at least allowed some mitigation of the curse of Babel What one could translatewas the meaning the sense of the text and this could be conveyed in vernaculartongues as well as in classical ones The question of whether and how to translateHoly Writ into vernacular languages became a central religious and political de-bate one of the central issues of the Reformation With the Bible translations of the

sixteenth century translation itself came to be an essential part of a double goalto reveal the referential meaning of Holy Writ to anyone who could read the ver-nacular thus dispossessing the clergy of their monopoly on sacred texts and at thesame time to valorize the vernacular itself as a national tongue since a part of theProtestant argument was for national churches headed in each case by the secularhead of the country not by the pope

In Protestant translation practice what is important is not the particular formof the language but that the referential meaning be conveyed in a colloquial ver-nacular that Everyman can understand This view was expressed clearly by Lutherthe goal is ldquoto produce clear language comprehensible to everyone with an un-

distorted sense and meaningrdquo (ldquoPreface to the Book of Jobrdquo cited in Rosenzweig[1926] 1994 48) ldquoin speech the meaning and subject matter must be considerednot the grammar for the grammar shall not rule over the meaningrdquo (ldquoTranslatorrsquosletterrdquo 1530 cited in Bassnett 2014 59) This view has continued to inspire Prot-estant translation theory up to this day notably that of the Summer Institute ofLinguistics true conversion requires that Godrsquos Word be accessible in the speakerrsquosown language (see eg Handman 2007)

In Italy parallel issues arose around the Questione della lingua what languageshould serve as the cultural cement for Italy now thought of as at least a potentialnational entity in spite of its political fragmentation Here the basic argument was

that the multiplicity of vernaculars was an aspect of the diversity of the world in it-self a good thing an expression of Godrsquos infinite creative power As Claude-GilbertDubois puts it about this period in Italy and in a France heavily influenced by

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 198

Italian thinking we ldquowitness a kind of ennobling of the multiple Multiplicationis not corruption but fecundityrdquo (1970 119)

This is an enormous shift from the medieval view of an ordered hierarchy itis no longer easy to tell what is superior and what is inferior In the words of theFlorentine humanist Benedetto Varchi (1503ndash65) ldquoIn the universe there must exist all the things that can exist and nothing is so small or so ugly (tanto picciolanegrave cosigrave laida) that it does not contribute and add to the perfection of the universerdquo(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 181) If even the smallest and ugliest thing adds to theperfection of the universe this implies a fundamental incommensurability insteadof a clear hierarchy perfection is an infinite scatter And this refusal of hierarchyapplies to languages as well one cannot assert the superiority of some languagesover others In his Dialogo delle lingue ([1542] 2009 35) the Paduan humanistSperone Speroni (1500ndash1588) has his mouthpiece assert ldquoI hold it certain that thelanguages of every country such as the Arabic and the Indian like the Roman andthe Athenian are of equal valuerdquo

The implication of this argument is then to challenge the Babel story and saythat the multiplicity and diversity of languages is neither a curse nor a mere felixculpa but a positive good a gift from God This was said explicitly by the Sienesehumanist Claudio Tolomei (1492ndash1556) ldquoFecund nature (la feconda natura) didnot accept that there should be a single form of speech in this great and variededifice of the worldrdquo (1531 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 180) Varchi for his partconcludes ldquoI say that nature could not and indeed perhaps should not have madea single language for the whole worldrdquo (cited in Demonet 1992 513)

Edward Stankiewicz sums up the views of this period ldquoOne of the central no-

tions in this program is the recognition that each of the individual living languag-es has a place in the overall scheme of things and that each of them is endowedwith linguistic properties which make up its distinctive character or lsquogeniusrsquordquo(1981 180)

The second part of this statement raises the notion of the distinctiveness of eachlanguage Languages are not only valuable but their value lies in their differing spe-cifics the distinctive character or genius of each one Dubois (1970 119) makes anexplicit link between the diversity of words and the new idea of an infinite pluralityof distinct worlds proposed by Giordano Bruno later in the century ldquoThe pluralityof languages like the plurality of worlds invented by Giordano Bruno during the

same period demonstrates the immense richness of the spiritrdquoBut the evocation of Bruno (1548ndash1600) raises a different point We have seenthat for Luther and for Reformation Bible translators generally what mattered wasa clear conveyance of referential meaningmdashprecisely not the exploitation of thespecific riches of each language Brunorsquos own defense of translation was based ona similar view of philosophical and what we would call scientific discourse Brunosaid that it was perfectly all right to read Aristotle in an Italian translation ratherthan the original Greek in that either of these permitted the reader to test Aristotlersquostheories empirically and so recognize Aristotlersquos errors Scientific knowledge wasbased not on the ldquopedantryrdquo of knowing Greek and Latin not on the word but on

knowledge of the worldUnlike the Bible translators the Italian theorists went on to justify a differentside of language use from that of either Scripture or science in literary and poetic

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

199 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

discourse the unique genius of each language comes into fruition as a form of so-cial play The Florentine shoemaker-sage Giovan Battista Gelli (1498ndash1563) writesthat ldquoevery language has its particularities and its caprices (capresterie)rdquo ([1551]1976 201ndash2) Varchi writes that Florentine has a ldquocertain peculiar or special orparticular property as do all other languagesrdquo and boasts of ldquocertain qualities andcapricious turns (certe proprietagrave e capestrerie) in which the Florentine languageaboundsrdquo And these turns are particularly apparent in everyday popular discourse(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182ndash83) Language cannot be encompassed in a definiteset of rules according to Varchi because the rational faculty is incapable of captur-ing the expressive power of language in everyday speech ldquoReason should prevailand win in all matters except in language where if reason is contrary to usage orusage to reason it is usage not reason which must always take precedencerdquo (citedin ibid 183)

The most famous phrasing of this distinctive quality was in Joachim du Bellayrsquos1549 Deffense et illustration de la langue franccediloyse Most of this text is a translationfrom Speronirsquos Dialogo but it is du Bellay who specifies that each language pos-sesses a certain je ne scais quoy propremdashand he makes this point as part of a discus-sion of the difficulties of translation as indeed do a number of Italian authors Eachlanguage has its own force and beauty ( forze e bellezza) which cannot be carriedover into another tongue Gelli ([1551] 1976 201) writes ldquoThey say that discourses(cose) that are translated from one language into another never have the same forceor beauty that they had in their own To say things in one language in the styleof another has no grace at allrdquo

Repeatedly the discussion of the distinctiveness of each language is part of the

discussion of the difficulties of translation The examples used are usually liter-ary ones Homer Virgil and Dante or Petrarchmdashand notably not Aristotlemdashnoneof whose work can be translated without losing its most important quality thedistinctive beauty of each We find the example in the De subtilitate (1550) of theperipatetic mathematician-physician Girolamo Cardano (1501ndash76)

The utility of the diversity of languages is that they can thereby expressall the affects of the soul The proof is that one cannot express Homerrsquossentences in Latin or in our mother tongue nor Virgil in Greek or in ourmother tongue and even less the poems of Francesco Petrarch in Latinor Greek (Cited in Dubois 1970 118)

Implicit in the discussion is a distinction between two goals of discourse thatof conveying information and that of projecting the force and beauty of a lan-guagemdashto use anachronistic terms between the referential and poetic functionsof language Translations from any language into any language can convey whatwe could call referential meaning but fail to convey play capresterie the force andbeauty deriving from specific circumstances of social life The distinction is cen-tral for Bruno and Gelli writes ldquoI know that translation is done for the sake ofsciences and not to display the power and beauty of languagesrdquo ([1551] 1976202 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182) The formal distinction of the two modes wasmade by Sir Francis Bacon (1561ndash1626) between literary grammar which dealswith languages and which cannot really render the je ne scai quoy of each languagein translation and philosophical grammar which deals with ldquothe analogy between

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 200

words and things or reasonrdquo (Huumlllen 2001 213) and is in fact adequate for theadvancement of learning

Already then different goals of translation were being distinguished in the sev-enteenth century For Protestants the Sacred Scripture plays the role of sciencefor Gelli or Bruno in both cases the goal is to convey clear meanings that are ofimmediate spiritual or secular use But both presume the possibility of anotherattitude one that fully recognizes the genius of each language This possibility isdeveloped above all by the Italians with their recognition that linguistic worlds areconstructed by bringing out the possibilities of each language in social interactionand in play

ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

By the early 1600s the French language and French style were dominating EuropeAlready in the previous century French discussion of translation had tended tobe nationalistic and notably contrasted the ldquodirect orderrdquo of the French sentence(SubjectndashVerbndashObject with adjectives coming for the most part after the noun)with the horrid mixup of Latin word order With the rise of Cartesian rationalismthe assumption came to be strongly reinforced that all human beings think in thesame way languages being a mere means of external formulation and communica-tion When Descartes himself was challenged (by Hobbes) as to whether what hecalled reason could really be merely a local way of linking words he replied ldquoWhodoubts that a Frenchman and a German can have the same thoughts or reasonings

about the same things despite the fact that the words they think of are complete-ly differentrdquo (Descartes 1984 II 125ndash26) In 1669 Descartesrsquo follower Louis LeLaboureur claimed that since everyone in the world thought in the direct order ofFrench the Romans too must have conceived their sentences in French then addeda step to scramble the syntax before speaking or writing

This basic position as well as a strong sense of cultural self-sufficiency mo-tivated French translation theory The argument was that the translator shouldreproduce not just the words of the text but also the effect it had on its originalreaders Since the text was not exotic or strange-sounding for its intended publicwe should translate it in a way that is not disturbing for our public If this requires

changing meanings so be it such changes will in fact often be an improvementon what are sometimes needlessly repetitive longwinded incoherent or indeli-cate originals And this applies equally to scientific religious and literary worksIn the words of the great translator of the century Nicolas Perrot drsquoAblancourt(1606ndash64)

It would be a Judaic superstition to attach oneself to the words andabandon the design for which they were used It is only rendering halfof an Author if one cuts off his eloquence As he was agreeable in his ownlanguage he should be so in ours as well and insofar as the beauties andgraces of the two are different we should not hesitate to give him those

of our own country since we are removing his Otherwise we would bemaking an ugly (meschante) copy of an admirable original (1638 citedin Horguelin 1996 76)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

201 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

When Perrotrsquos translation of Tacitusmdashin which he says he sought ldquoto look not somuch to what [the author] said as to what he should say ldquo (cited in ibid 78)mdashcameout during the 1640s the general opinion was that it was a great improvement onthe original But a more extreme statement accompanies his 1654 translation ofthe quite scatological Greek satirist Lucian of Samosata Plainly there is plenty inLucian that would shock seventeenth-century French sensibilities

It was necessary to change all this to make something agreeableotherwise it would not have been Lucian For this reason I do notalways attach myself to the words or the ideas of this Author andmaintaining his goal I arrange things to our air and our style Differenttimes require not only different words but different thoughts and it isthe custom of Ambassadors to dress in the fashion of the land to whichthey have been sent for fear of appearing ridiculous to those they aimto please It is true that this is not strictly speaking Translation but it isbetter than Translation (Cited in Horguelin 1996 80)

Indeed Perrot would write that his translation of Thucydides had brought his au-thor back from the dead in the form of a modern Frenchman this is somethingfor which Thucydides might well have been grateful On the contrary failing tochange the original sufficiently writes Perrot produces a ldquomonstrous bodyrdquo (corpsmonstreux cited in Venuti 1995 47)

Not everyonersquos arguments were as intelligently put as Perrotrsquos Pierre Perrin(c 1620ndash75) the so-called Abbeacute Perrin claimed that his 1648 translation of Virgilbrought Aeneas back as a French cavalier ldquodressed up with pomp and plume andbanglesrdquo (cited in Ladborough 1938 86)

There were a few detractors of this method mainly among philologists and whatwere called the traducteurs scrupuleux (as opposed to Perrot and the traducteurslibres) Among these Gilles Meacutenage (1613ndash92) is reported to have said that Perrotrsquostranslations were like a lady he had once known in Tours she had been belle butinfidegravele Since then the whole movement of elegant domesticating translation hasbeen known as ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

Many worlds

Unlike the French who saw French as the closest linguistic approximation to uni- versal values of reason and art seventeenth-century German scholars valorizedGerman for its very particularity and distinctiveness its German-ness JustusGeorg Schottel (1612ndash76) devotes a section of his Extensive work on the Germanlanguage (1663) to ldquoHow one should en-German (verteutschen)rdquomdashthis is charac-teristically an alternative German word for uumlbersetzen ldquotranslaterdquo

To achieve this [the improvement of German] the arts the scienceshistory and other realia should be dressed and become known in trulynatural German so that our language will not smell of un-GermanSpanish pride or Italian splendour gone stale or French pronunciation

and circumlocutions that are neither here nor there or of other thingsbut it will have its own short and euphonious German nature rich inmeaning and sense (Cited in Lefevere 1977 11)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 5: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

197 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

The feudal economy and social order were being replaced by an expanding capital-ism nation-states were on the rise with the valorization of state vernacular languag-es against Latin Western societies were conquering and colonizing whole sectionsof the globe setting up a world political-economic system New philosophical sys-tems and experimental sciences were coming into being and the great political-ideological structure of the church was being challenged from within For manyscholars of the century new worlds in many senses of the word were opening upOne focus of debate was the relative value of vernacular languages versus Latinand Greek another was the accessibility of both scientific and biblical truth to themasses of people and much of the discussion turned on questions of translation

The dominant medieval view had been that the diversity of languages was acurse Godrsquos punishment for the human pride manifested in the construction ofthe Tower of Babel Both Protestant reformers in the center and north of Europeand Catholic language activists in France and Italy challenged this view and sawlanguage diversity either as a positive good or as a problem that could be handledthrough translation I will begin with the better-known Protestant theories butdevote more time to Italian views of diversity since I presume that these are lessfamiliar to anthropologists

Translation for some Reformation thinkers such as John Calvin (1509ndash64)at least allowed some mitigation of the curse of Babel What one could translatewas the meaning the sense of the text and this could be conveyed in vernaculartongues as well as in classical ones The question of whether and how to translateHoly Writ into vernacular languages became a central religious and political de-bate one of the central issues of the Reformation With the Bible translations of the

sixteenth century translation itself came to be an essential part of a double goalto reveal the referential meaning of Holy Writ to anyone who could read the ver-nacular thus dispossessing the clergy of their monopoly on sacred texts and at thesame time to valorize the vernacular itself as a national tongue since a part of theProtestant argument was for national churches headed in each case by the secularhead of the country not by the pope

In Protestant translation practice what is important is not the particular formof the language but that the referential meaning be conveyed in a colloquial ver-nacular that Everyman can understand This view was expressed clearly by Lutherthe goal is ldquoto produce clear language comprehensible to everyone with an un-

distorted sense and meaningrdquo (ldquoPreface to the Book of Jobrdquo cited in Rosenzweig[1926] 1994 48) ldquoin speech the meaning and subject matter must be considerednot the grammar for the grammar shall not rule over the meaningrdquo (ldquoTranslatorrsquosletterrdquo 1530 cited in Bassnett 2014 59) This view has continued to inspire Prot-estant translation theory up to this day notably that of the Summer Institute ofLinguistics true conversion requires that Godrsquos Word be accessible in the speakerrsquosown language (see eg Handman 2007)

In Italy parallel issues arose around the Questione della lingua what languageshould serve as the cultural cement for Italy now thought of as at least a potentialnational entity in spite of its political fragmentation Here the basic argument was

that the multiplicity of vernaculars was an aspect of the diversity of the world in it-self a good thing an expression of Godrsquos infinite creative power As Claude-GilbertDubois puts it about this period in Italy and in a France heavily influenced by

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 198

Italian thinking we ldquowitness a kind of ennobling of the multiple Multiplicationis not corruption but fecundityrdquo (1970 119)

This is an enormous shift from the medieval view of an ordered hierarchy itis no longer easy to tell what is superior and what is inferior In the words of theFlorentine humanist Benedetto Varchi (1503ndash65) ldquoIn the universe there must exist all the things that can exist and nothing is so small or so ugly (tanto picciolanegrave cosigrave laida) that it does not contribute and add to the perfection of the universerdquo(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 181) If even the smallest and ugliest thing adds to theperfection of the universe this implies a fundamental incommensurability insteadof a clear hierarchy perfection is an infinite scatter And this refusal of hierarchyapplies to languages as well one cannot assert the superiority of some languagesover others In his Dialogo delle lingue ([1542] 2009 35) the Paduan humanistSperone Speroni (1500ndash1588) has his mouthpiece assert ldquoI hold it certain that thelanguages of every country such as the Arabic and the Indian like the Roman andthe Athenian are of equal valuerdquo

The implication of this argument is then to challenge the Babel story and saythat the multiplicity and diversity of languages is neither a curse nor a mere felixculpa but a positive good a gift from God This was said explicitly by the Sienesehumanist Claudio Tolomei (1492ndash1556) ldquoFecund nature (la feconda natura) didnot accept that there should be a single form of speech in this great and variededifice of the worldrdquo (1531 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 180) Varchi for his partconcludes ldquoI say that nature could not and indeed perhaps should not have madea single language for the whole worldrdquo (cited in Demonet 1992 513)

Edward Stankiewicz sums up the views of this period ldquoOne of the central no-

tions in this program is the recognition that each of the individual living languag-es has a place in the overall scheme of things and that each of them is endowedwith linguistic properties which make up its distinctive character or lsquogeniusrsquordquo(1981 180)

The second part of this statement raises the notion of the distinctiveness of eachlanguage Languages are not only valuable but their value lies in their differing spe-cifics the distinctive character or genius of each one Dubois (1970 119) makes anexplicit link between the diversity of words and the new idea of an infinite pluralityof distinct worlds proposed by Giordano Bruno later in the century ldquoThe pluralityof languages like the plurality of worlds invented by Giordano Bruno during the

same period demonstrates the immense richness of the spiritrdquoBut the evocation of Bruno (1548ndash1600) raises a different point We have seenthat for Luther and for Reformation Bible translators generally what mattered wasa clear conveyance of referential meaningmdashprecisely not the exploitation of thespecific riches of each language Brunorsquos own defense of translation was based ona similar view of philosophical and what we would call scientific discourse Brunosaid that it was perfectly all right to read Aristotle in an Italian translation ratherthan the original Greek in that either of these permitted the reader to test Aristotlersquostheories empirically and so recognize Aristotlersquos errors Scientific knowledge wasbased not on the ldquopedantryrdquo of knowing Greek and Latin not on the word but on

knowledge of the worldUnlike the Bible translators the Italian theorists went on to justify a differentside of language use from that of either Scripture or science in literary and poetic

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

199 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

discourse the unique genius of each language comes into fruition as a form of so-cial play The Florentine shoemaker-sage Giovan Battista Gelli (1498ndash1563) writesthat ldquoevery language has its particularities and its caprices (capresterie)rdquo ([1551]1976 201ndash2) Varchi writes that Florentine has a ldquocertain peculiar or special orparticular property as do all other languagesrdquo and boasts of ldquocertain qualities andcapricious turns (certe proprietagrave e capestrerie) in which the Florentine languageaboundsrdquo And these turns are particularly apparent in everyday popular discourse(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182ndash83) Language cannot be encompassed in a definiteset of rules according to Varchi because the rational faculty is incapable of captur-ing the expressive power of language in everyday speech ldquoReason should prevailand win in all matters except in language where if reason is contrary to usage orusage to reason it is usage not reason which must always take precedencerdquo (citedin ibid 183)

The most famous phrasing of this distinctive quality was in Joachim du Bellayrsquos1549 Deffense et illustration de la langue franccediloyse Most of this text is a translationfrom Speronirsquos Dialogo but it is du Bellay who specifies that each language pos-sesses a certain je ne scais quoy propremdashand he makes this point as part of a discus-sion of the difficulties of translation as indeed do a number of Italian authors Eachlanguage has its own force and beauty ( forze e bellezza) which cannot be carriedover into another tongue Gelli ([1551] 1976 201) writes ldquoThey say that discourses(cose) that are translated from one language into another never have the same forceor beauty that they had in their own To say things in one language in the styleof another has no grace at allrdquo

Repeatedly the discussion of the distinctiveness of each language is part of the

discussion of the difficulties of translation The examples used are usually liter-ary ones Homer Virgil and Dante or Petrarchmdashand notably not Aristotlemdashnoneof whose work can be translated without losing its most important quality thedistinctive beauty of each We find the example in the De subtilitate (1550) of theperipatetic mathematician-physician Girolamo Cardano (1501ndash76)

The utility of the diversity of languages is that they can thereby expressall the affects of the soul The proof is that one cannot express Homerrsquossentences in Latin or in our mother tongue nor Virgil in Greek or in ourmother tongue and even less the poems of Francesco Petrarch in Latinor Greek (Cited in Dubois 1970 118)

Implicit in the discussion is a distinction between two goals of discourse thatof conveying information and that of projecting the force and beauty of a lan-guagemdashto use anachronistic terms between the referential and poetic functionsof language Translations from any language into any language can convey whatwe could call referential meaning but fail to convey play capresterie the force andbeauty deriving from specific circumstances of social life The distinction is cen-tral for Bruno and Gelli writes ldquoI know that translation is done for the sake ofsciences and not to display the power and beauty of languagesrdquo ([1551] 1976202 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182) The formal distinction of the two modes wasmade by Sir Francis Bacon (1561ndash1626) between literary grammar which dealswith languages and which cannot really render the je ne scai quoy of each languagein translation and philosophical grammar which deals with ldquothe analogy between

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 200

words and things or reasonrdquo (Huumlllen 2001 213) and is in fact adequate for theadvancement of learning

Already then different goals of translation were being distinguished in the sev-enteenth century For Protestants the Sacred Scripture plays the role of sciencefor Gelli or Bruno in both cases the goal is to convey clear meanings that are ofimmediate spiritual or secular use But both presume the possibility of anotherattitude one that fully recognizes the genius of each language This possibility isdeveloped above all by the Italians with their recognition that linguistic worlds areconstructed by bringing out the possibilities of each language in social interactionand in play

ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

By the early 1600s the French language and French style were dominating EuropeAlready in the previous century French discussion of translation had tended tobe nationalistic and notably contrasted the ldquodirect orderrdquo of the French sentence(SubjectndashVerbndashObject with adjectives coming for the most part after the noun)with the horrid mixup of Latin word order With the rise of Cartesian rationalismthe assumption came to be strongly reinforced that all human beings think in thesame way languages being a mere means of external formulation and communica-tion When Descartes himself was challenged (by Hobbes) as to whether what hecalled reason could really be merely a local way of linking words he replied ldquoWhodoubts that a Frenchman and a German can have the same thoughts or reasonings

about the same things despite the fact that the words they think of are complete-ly differentrdquo (Descartes 1984 II 125ndash26) In 1669 Descartesrsquo follower Louis LeLaboureur claimed that since everyone in the world thought in the direct order ofFrench the Romans too must have conceived their sentences in French then addeda step to scramble the syntax before speaking or writing

This basic position as well as a strong sense of cultural self-sufficiency mo-tivated French translation theory The argument was that the translator shouldreproduce not just the words of the text but also the effect it had on its originalreaders Since the text was not exotic or strange-sounding for its intended publicwe should translate it in a way that is not disturbing for our public If this requires

changing meanings so be it such changes will in fact often be an improvementon what are sometimes needlessly repetitive longwinded incoherent or indeli-cate originals And this applies equally to scientific religious and literary worksIn the words of the great translator of the century Nicolas Perrot drsquoAblancourt(1606ndash64)

It would be a Judaic superstition to attach oneself to the words andabandon the design for which they were used It is only rendering halfof an Author if one cuts off his eloquence As he was agreeable in his ownlanguage he should be so in ours as well and insofar as the beauties andgraces of the two are different we should not hesitate to give him those

of our own country since we are removing his Otherwise we would bemaking an ugly (meschante) copy of an admirable original (1638 citedin Horguelin 1996 76)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

201 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

When Perrotrsquos translation of Tacitusmdashin which he says he sought ldquoto look not somuch to what [the author] said as to what he should say ldquo (cited in ibid 78)mdashcameout during the 1640s the general opinion was that it was a great improvement onthe original But a more extreme statement accompanies his 1654 translation ofthe quite scatological Greek satirist Lucian of Samosata Plainly there is plenty inLucian that would shock seventeenth-century French sensibilities

It was necessary to change all this to make something agreeableotherwise it would not have been Lucian For this reason I do notalways attach myself to the words or the ideas of this Author andmaintaining his goal I arrange things to our air and our style Differenttimes require not only different words but different thoughts and it isthe custom of Ambassadors to dress in the fashion of the land to whichthey have been sent for fear of appearing ridiculous to those they aimto please It is true that this is not strictly speaking Translation but it isbetter than Translation (Cited in Horguelin 1996 80)

Indeed Perrot would write that his translation of Thucydides had brought his au-thor back from the dead in the form of a modern Frenchman this is somethingfor which Thucydides might well have been grateful On the contrary failing tochange the original sufficiently writes Perrot produces a ldquomonstrous bodyrdquo (corpsmonstreux cited in Venuti 1995 47)

Not everyonersquos arguments were as intelligently put as Perrotrsquos Pierre Perrin(c 1620ndash75) the so-called Abbeacute Perrin claimed that his 1648 translation of Virgilbrought Aeneas back as a French cavalier ldquodressed up with pomp and plume andbanglesrdquo (cited in Ladborough 1938 86)

There were a few detractors of this method mainly among philologists and whatwere called the traducteurs scrupuleux (as opposed to Perrot and the traducteurslibres) Among these Gilles Meacutenage (1613ndash92) is reported to have said that Perrotrsquostranslations were like a lady he had once known in Tours she had been belle butinfidegravele Since then the whole movement of elegant domesticating translation hasbeen known as ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

Many worlds

Unlike the French who saw French as the closest linguistic approximation to uni- versal values of reason and art seventeenth-century German scholars valorizedGerman for its very particularity and distinctiveness its German-ness JustusGeorg Schottel (1612ndash76) devotes a section of his Extensive work on the Germanlanguage (1663) to ldquoHow one should en-German (verteutschen)rdquomdashthis is charac-teristically an alternative German word for uumlbersetzen ldquotranslaterdquo

To achieve this [the improvement of German] the arts the scienceshistory and other realia should be dressed and become known in trulynatural German so that our language will not smell of un-GermanSpanish pride or Italian splendour gone stale or French pronunciation

and circumlocutions that are neither here nor there or of other thingsbut it will have its own short and euphonious German nature rich inmeaning and sense (Cited in Lefevere 1977 11)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 6: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 198

Italian thinking we ldquowitness a kind of ennobling of the multiple Multiplicationis not corruption but fecundityrdquo (1970 119)

This is an enormous shift from the medieval view of an ordered hierarchy itis no longer easy to tell what is superior and what is inferior In the words of theFlorentine humanist Benedetto Varchi (1503ndash65) ldquoIn the universe there must exist all the things that can exist and nothing is so small or so ugly (tanto picciolanegrave cosigrave laida) that it does not contribute and add to the perfection of the universerdquo(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 181) If even the smallest and ugliest thing adds to theperfection of the universe this implies a fundamental incommensurability insteadof a clear hierarchy perfection is an infinite scatter And this refusal of hierarchyapplies to languages as well one cannot assert the superiority of some languagesover others In his Dialogo delle lingue ([1542] 2009 35) the Paduan humanistSperone Speroni (1500ndash1588) has his mouthpiece assert ldquoI hold it certain that thelanguages of every country such as the Arabic and the Indian like the Roman andthe Athenian are of equal valuerdquo

The implication of this argument is then to challenge the Babel story and saythat the multiplicity and diversity of languages is neither a curse nor a mere felixculpa but a positive good a gift from God This was said explicitly by the Sienesehumanist Claudio Tolomei (1492ndash1556) ldquoFecund nature (la feconda natura) didnot accept that there should be a single form of speech in this great and variededifice of the worldrdquo (1531 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 180) Varchi for his partconcludes ldquoI say that nature could not and indeed perhaps should not have madea single language for the whole worldrdquo (cited in Demonet 1992 513)

Edward Stankiewicz sums up the views of this period ldquoOne of the central no-

tions in this program is the recognition that each of the individual living languag-es has a place in the overall scheme of things and that each of them is endowedwith linguistic properties which make up its distinctive character or lsquogeniusrsquordquo(1981 180)

The second part of this statement raises the notion of the distinctiveness of eachlanguage Languages are not only valuable but their value lies in their differing spe-cifics the distinctive character or genius of each one Dubois (1970 119) makes anexplicit link between the diversity of words and the new idea of an infinite pluralityof distinct worlds proposed by Giordano Bruno later in the century ldquoThe pluralityof languages like the plurality of worlds invented by Giordano Bruno during the

same period demonstrates the immense richness of the spiritrdquoBut the evocation of Bruno (1548ndash1600) raises a different point We have seenthat for Luther and for Reformation Bible translators generally what mattered wasa clear conveyance of referential meaningmdashprecisely not the exploitation of thespecific riches of each language Brunorsquos own defense of translation was based ona similar view of philosophical and what we would call scientific discourse Brunosaid that it was perfectly all right to read Aristotle in an Italian translation ratherthan the original Greek in that either of these permitted the reader to test Aristotlersquostheories empirically and so recognize Aristotlersquos errors Scientific knowledge wasbased not on the ldquopedantryrdquo of knowing Greek and Latin not on the word but on

knowledge of the worldUnlike the Bible translators the Italian theorists went on to justify a differentside of language use from that of either Scripture or science in literary and poetic

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

199 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

discourse the unique genius of each language comes into fruition as a form of so-cial play The Florentine shoemaker-sage Giovan Battista Gelli (1498ndash1563) writesthat ldquoevery language has its particularities and its caprices (capresterie)rdquo ([1551]1976 201ndash2) Varchi writes that Florentine has a ldquocertain peculiar or special orparticular property as do all other languagesrdquo and boasts of ldquocertain qualities andcapricious turns (certe proprietagrave e capestrerie) in which the Florentine languageaboundsrdquo And these turns are particularly apparent in everyday popular discourse(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182ndash83) Language cannot be encompassed in a definiteset of rules according to Varchi because the rational faculty is incapable of captur-ing the expressive power of language in everyday speech ldquoReason should prevailand win in all matters except in language where if reason is contrary to usage orusage to reason it is usage not reason which must always take precedencerdquo (citedin ibid 183)

The most famous phrasing of this distinctive quality was in Joachim du Bellayrsquos1549 Deffense et illustration de la langue franccediloyse Most of this text is a translationfrom Speronirsquos Dialogo but it is du Bellay who specifies that each language pos-sesses a certain je ne scais quoy propremdashand he makes this point as part of a discus-sion of the difficulties of translation as indeed do a number of Italian authors Eachlanguage has its own force and beauty ( forze e bellezza) which cannot be carriedover into another tongue Gelli ([1551] 1976 201) writes ldquoThey say that discourses(cose) that are translated from one language into another never have the same forceor beauty that they had in their own To say things in one language in the styleof another has no grace at allrdquo

Repeatedly the discussion of the distinctiveness of each language is part of the

discussion of the difficulties of translation The examples used are usually liter-ary ones Homer Virgil and Dante or Petrarchmdashand notably not Aristotlemdashnoneof whose work can be translated without losing its most important quality thedistinctive beauty of each We find the example in the De subtilitate (1550) of theperipatetic mathematician-physician Girolamo Cardano (1501ndash76)

The utility of the diversity of languages is that they can thereby expressall the affects of the soul The proof is that one cannot express Homerrsquossentences in Latin or in our mother tongue nor Virgil in Greek or in ourmother tongue and even less the poems of Francesco Petrarch in Latinor Greek (Cited in Dubois 1970 118)

Implicit in the discussion is a distinction between two goals of discourse thatof conveying information and that of projecting the force and beauty of a lan-guagemdashto use anachronistic terms between the referential and poetic functionsof language Translations from any language into any language can convey whatwe could call referential meaning but fail to convey play capresterie the force andbeauty deriving from specific circumstances of social life The distinction is cen-tral for Bruno and Gelli writes ldquoI know that translation is done for the sake ofsciences and not to display the power and beauty of languagesrdquo ([1551] 1976202 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182) The formal distinction of the two modes wasmade by Sir Francis Bacon (1561ndash1626) between literary grammar which dealswith languages and which cannot really render the je ne scai quoy of each languagein translation and philosophical grammar which deals with ldquothe analogy between

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 200

words and things or reasonrdquo (Huumlllen 2001 213) and is in fact adequate for theadvancement of learning

Already then different goals of translation were being distinguished in the sev-enteenth century For Protestants the Sacred Scripture plays the role of sciencefor Gelli or Bruno in both cases the goal is to convey clear meanings that are ofimmediate spiritual or secular use But both presume the possibility of anotherattitude one that fully recognizes the genius of each language This possibility isdeveloped above all by the Italians with their recognition that linguistic worlds areconstructed by bringing out the possibilities of each language in social interactionand in play

ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

By the early 1600s the French language and French style were dominating EuropeAlready in the previous century French discussion of translation had tended tobe nationalistic and notably contrasted the ldquodirect orderrdquo of the French sentence(SubjectndashVerbndashObject with adjectives coming for the most part after the noun)with the horrid mixup of Latin word order With the rise of Cartesian rationalismthe assumption came to be strongly reinforced that all human beings think in thesame way languages being a mere means of external formulation and communica-tion When Descartes himself was challenged (by Hobbes) as to whether what hecalled reason could really be merely a local way of linking words he replied ldquoWhodoubts that a Frenchman and a German can have the same thoughts or reasonings

about the same things despite the fact that the words they think of are complete-ly differentrdquo (Descartes 1984 II 125ndash26) In 1669 Descartesrsquo follower Louis LeLaboureur claimed that since everyone in the world thought in the direct order ofFrench the Romans too must have conceived their sentences in French then addeda step to scramble the syntax before speaking or writing

This basic position as well as a strong sense of cultural self-sufficiency mo-tivated French translation theory The argument was that the translator shouldreproduce not just the words of the text but also the effect it had on its originalreaders Since the text was not exotic or strange-sounding for its intended publicwe should translate it in a way that is not disturbing for our public If this requires

changing meanings so be it such changes will in fact often be an improvementon what are sometimes needlessly repetitive longwinded incoherent or indeli-cate originals And this applies equally to scientific religious and literary worksIn the words of the great translator of the century Nicolas Perrot drsquoAblancourt(1606ndash64)

It would be a Judaic superstition to attach oneself to the words andabandon the design for which they were used It is only rendering halfof an Author if one cuts off his eloquence As he was agreeable in his ownlanguage he should be so in ours as well and insofar as the beauties andgraces of the two are different we should not hesitate to give him those

of our own country since we are removing his Otherwise we would bemaking an ugly (meschante) copy of an admirable original (1638 citedin Horguelin 1996 76)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

201 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

When Perrotrsquos translation of Tacitusmdashin which he says he sought ldquoto look not somuch to what [the author] said as to what he should say ldquo (cited in ibid 78)mdashcameout during the 1640s the general opinion was that it was a great improvement onthe original But a more extreme statement accompanies his 1654 translation ofthe quite scatological Greek satirist Lucian of Samosata Plainly there is plenty inLucian that would shock seventeenth-century French sensibilities

It was necessary to change all this to make something agreeableotherwise it would not have been Lucian For this reason I do notalways attach myself to the words or the ideas of this Author andmaintaining his goal I arrange things to our air and our style Differenttimes require not only different words but different thoughts and it isthe custom of Ambassadors to dress in the fashion of the land to whichthey have been sent for fear of appearing ridiculous to those they aimto please It is true that this is not strictly speaking Translation but it isbetter than Translation (Cited in Horguelin 1996 80)

Indeed Perrot would write that his translation of Thucydides had brought his au-thor back from the dead in the form of a modern Frenchman this is somethingfor which Thucydides might well have been grateful On the contrary failing tochange the original sufficiently writes Perrot produces a ldquomonstrous bodyrdquo (corpsmonstreux cited in Venuti 1995 47)

Not everyonersquos arguments were as intelligently put as Perrotrsquos Pierre Perrin(c 1620ndash75) the so-called Abbeacute Perrin claimed that his 1648 translation of Virgilbrought Aeneas back as a French cavalier ldquodressed up with pomp and plume andbanglesrdquo (cited in Ladborough 1938 86)

There were a few detractors of this method mainly among philologists and whatwere called the traducteurs scrupuleux (as opposed to Perrot and the traducteurslibres) Among these Gilles Meacutenage (1613ndash92) is reported to have said that Perrotrsquostranslations were like a lady he had once known in Tours she had been belle butinfidegravele Since then the whole movement of elegant domesticating translation hasbeen known as ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

Many worlds

Unlike the French who saw French as the closest linguistic approximation to uni- versal values of reason and art seventeenth-century German scholars valorizedGerman for its very particularity and distinctiveness its German-ness JustusGeorg Schottel (1612ndash76) devotes a section of his Extensive work on the Germanlanguage (1663) to ldquoHow one should en-German (verteutschen)rdquomdashthis is charac-teristically an alternative German word for uumlbersetzen ldquotranslaterdquo

To achieve this [the improvement of German] the arts the scienceshistory and other realia should be dressed and become known in trulynatural German so that our language will not smell of un-GermanSpanish pride or Italian splendour gone stale or French pronunciation

and circumlocutions that are neither here nor there or of other thingsbut it will have its own short and euphonious German nature rich inmeaning and sense (Cited in Lefevere 1977 11)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 7: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

199 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

discourse the unique genius of each language comes into fruition as a form of so-cial play The Florentine shoemaker-sage Giovan Battista Gelli (1498ndash1563) writesthat ldquoevery language has its particularities and its caprices (capresterie)rdquo ([1551]1976 201ndash2) Varchi writes that Florentine has a ldquocertain peculiar or special orparticular property as do all other languagesrdquo and boasts of ldquocertain qualities andcapricious turns (certe proprietagrave e capestrerie) in which the Florentine languageaboundsrdquo And these turns are particularly apparent in everyday popular discourse(cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182ndash83) Language cannot be encompassed in a definiteset of rules according to Varchi because the rational faculty is incapable of captur-ing the expressive power of language in everyday speech ldquoReason should prevailand win in all matters except in language where if reason is contrary to usage orusage to reason it is usage not reason which must always take precedencerdquo (citedin ibid 183)

The most famous phrasing of this distinctive quality was in Joachim du Bellayrsquos1549 Deffense et illustration de la langue franccediloyse Most of this text is a translationfrom Speronirsquos Dialogo but it is du Bellay who specifies that each language pos-sesses a certain je ne scais quoy propremdashand he makes this point as part of a discus-sion of the difficulties of translation as indeed do a number of Italian authors Eachlanguage has its own force and beauty ( forze e bellezza) which cannot be carriedover into another tongue Gelli ([1551] 1976 201) writes ldquoThey say that discourses(cose) that are translated from one language into another never have the same forceor beauty that they had in their own To say things in one language in the styleof another has no grace at allrdquo

Repeatedly the discussion of the distinctiveness of each language is part of the

discussion of the difficulties of translation The examples used are usually liter-ary ones Homer Virgil and Dante or Petrarchmdashand notably not Aristotlemdashnoneof whose work can be translated without losing its most important quality thedistinctive beauty of each We find the example in the De subtilitate (1550) of theperipatetic mathematician-physician Girolamo Cardano (1501ndash76)

The utility of the diversity of languages is that they can thereby expressall the affects of the soul The proof is that one cannot express Homerrsquossentences in Latin or in our mother tongue nor Virgil in Greek or in ourmother tongue and even less the poems of Francesco Petrarch in Latinor Greek (Cited in Dubois 1970 118)

Implicit in the discussion is a distinction between two goals of discourse thatof conveying information and that of projecting the force and beauty of a lan-guagemdashto use anachronistic terms between the referential and poetic functionsof language Translations from any language into any language can convey whatwe could call referential meaning but fail to convey play capresterie the force andbeauty deriving from specific circumstances of social life The distinction is cen-tral for Bruno and Gelli writes ldquoI know that translation is done for the sake ofsciences and not to display the power and beauty of languagesrdquo ([1551] 1976202 cited in Stankiewicz 1981 182) The formal distinction of the two modes wasmade by Sir Francis Bacon (1561ndash1626) between literary grammar which dealswith languages and which cannot really render the je ne scai quoy of each languagein translation and philosophical grammar which deals with ldquothe analogy between

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 200

words and things or reasonrdquo (Huumlllen 2001 213) and is in fact adequate for theadvancement of learning

Already then different goals of translation were being distinguished in the sev-enteenth century For Protestants the Sacred Scripture plays the role of sciencefor Gelli or Bruno in both cases the goal is to convey clear meanings that are ofimmediate spiritual or secular use But both presume the possibility of anotherattitude one that fully recognizes the genius of each language This possibility isdeveloped above all by the Italians with their recognition that linguistic worlds areconstructed by bringing out the possibilities of each language in social interactionand in play

ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

By the early 1600s the French language and French style were dominating EuropeAlready in the previous century French discussion of translation had tended tobe nationalistic and notably contrasted the ldquodirect orderrdquo of the French sentence(SubjectndashVerbndashObject with adjectives coming for the most part after the noun)with the horrid mixup of Latin word order With the rise of Cartesian rationalismthe assumption came to be strongly reinforced that all human beings think in thesame way languages being a mere means of external formulation and communica-tion When Descartes himself was challenged (by Hobbes) as to whether what hecalled reason could really be merely a local way of linking words he replied ldquoWhodoubts that a Frenchman and a German can have the same thoughts or reasonings

about the same things despite the fact that the words they think of are complete-ly differentrdquo (Descartes 1984 II 125ndash26) In 1669 Descartesrsquo follower Louis LeLaboureur claimed that since everyone in the world thought in the direct order ofFrench the Romans too must have conceived their sentences in French then addeda step to scramble the syntax before speaking or writing

This basic position as well as a strong sense of cultural self-sufficiency mo-tivated French translation theory The argument was that the translator shouldreproduce not just the words of the text but also the effect it had on its originalreaders Since the text was not exotic or strange-sounding for its intended publicwe should translate it in a way that is not disturbing for our public If this requires

changing meanings so be it such changes will in fact often be an improvementon what are sometimes needlessly repetitive longwinded incoherent or indeli-cate originals And this applies equally to scientific religious and literary worksIn the words of the great translator of the century Nicolas Perrot drsquoAblancourt(1606ndash64)

It would be a Judaic superstition to attach oneself to the words andabandon the design for which they were used It is only rendering halfof an Author if one cuts off his eloquence As he was agreeable in his ownlanguage he should be so in ours as well and insofar as the beauties andgraces of the two are different we should not hesitate to give him those

of our own country since we are removing his Otherwise we would bemaking an ugly (meschante) copy of an admirable original (1638 citedin Horguelin 1996 76)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

201 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

When Perrotrsquos translation of Tacitusmdashin which he says he sought ldquoto look not somuch to what [the author] said as to what he should say ldquo (cited in ibid 78)mdashcameout during the 1640s the general opinion was that it was a great improvement onthe original But a more extreme statement accompanies his 1654 translation ofthe quite scatological Greek satirist Lucian of Samosata Plainly there is plenty inLucian that would shock seventeenth-century French sensibilities

It was necessary to change all this to make something agreeableotherwise it would not have been Lucian For this reason I do notalways attach myself to the words or the ideas of this Author andmaintaining his goal I arrange things to our air and our style Differenttimes require not only different words but different thoughts and it isthe custom of Ambassadors to dress in the fashion of the land to whichthey have been sent for fear of appearing ridiculous to those they aimto please It is true that this is not strictly speaking Translation but it isbetter than Translation (Cited in Horguelin 1996 80)

Indeed Perrot would write that his translation of Thucydides had brought his au-thor back from the dead in the form of a modern Frenchman this is somethingfor which Thucydides might well have been grateful On the contrary failing tochange the original sufficiently writes Perrot produces a ldquomonstrous bodyrdquo (corpsmonstreux cited in Venuti 1995 47)

Not everyonersquos arguments were as intelligently put as Perrotrsquos Pierre Perrin(c 1620ndash75) the so-called Abbeacute Perrin claimed that his 1648 translation of Virgilbrought Aeneas back as a French cavalier ldquodressed up with pomp and plume andbanglesrdquo (cited in Ladborough 1938 86)

There were a few detractors of this method mainly among philologists and whatwere called the traducteurs scrupuleux (as opposed to Perrot and the traducteurslibres) Among these Gilles Meacutenage (1613ndash92) is reported to have said that Perrotrsquostranslations were like a lady he had once known in Tours she had been belle butinfidegravele Since then the whole movement of elegant domesticating translation hasbeen known as ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

Many worlds

Unlike the French who saw French as the closest linguistic approximation to uni- versal values of reason and art seventeenth-century German scholars valorizedGerman for its very particularity and distinctiveness its German-ness JustusGeorg Schottel (1612ndash76) devotes a section of his Extensive work on the Germanlanguage (1663) to ldquoHow one should en-German (verteutschen)rdquomdashthis is charac-teristically an alternative German word for uumlbersetzen ldquotranslaterdquo

To achieve this [the improvement of German] the arts the scienceshistory and other realia should be dressed and become known in trulynatural German so that our language will not smell of un-GermanSpanish pride or Italian splendour gone stale or French pronunciation

and circumlocutions that are neither here nor there or of other thingsbut it will have its own short and euphonious German nature rich inmeaning and sense (Cited in Lefevere 1977 11)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 8: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 200

words and things or reasonrdquo (Huumlllen 2001 213) and is in fact adequate for theadvancement of learning

Already then different goals of translation were being distinguished in the sev-enteenth century For Protestants the Sacred Scripture plays the role of sciencefor Gelli or Bruno in both cases the goal is to convey clear meanings that are ofimmediate spiritual or secular use But both presume the possibility of anotherattitude one that fully recognizes the genius of each language This possibility isdeveloped above all by the Italians with their recognition that linguistic worlds areconstructed by bringing out the possibilities of each language in social interactionand in play

ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

By the early 1600s the French language and French style were dominating EuropeAlready in the previous century French discussion of translation had tended tobe nationalistic and notably contrasted the ldquodirect orderrdquo of the French sentence(SubjectndashVerbndashObject with adjectives coming for the most part after the noun)with the horrid mixup of Latin word order With the rise of Cartesian rationalismthe assumption came to be strongly reinforced that all human beings think in thesame way languages being a mere means of external formulation and communica-tion When Descartes himself was challenged (by Hobbes) as to whether what hecalled reason could really be merely a local way of linking words he replied ldquoWhodoubts that a Frenchman and a German can have the same thoughts or reasonings

about the same things despite the fact that the words they think of are complete-ly differentrdquo (Descartes 1984 II 125ndash26) In 1669 Descartesrsquo follower Louis LeLaboureur claimed that since everyone in the world thought in the direct order ofFrench the Romans too must have conceived their sentences in French then addeda step to scramble the syntax before speaking or writing

This basic position as well as a strong sense of cultural self-sufficiency mo-tivated French translation theory The argument was that the translator shouldreproduce not just the words of the text but also the effect it had on its originalreaders Since the text was not exotic or strange-sounding for its intended publicwe should translate it in a way that is not disturbing for our public If this requires

changing meanings so be it such changes will in fact often be an improvementon what are sometimes needlessly repetitive longwinded incoherent or indeli-cate originals And this applies equally to scientific religious and literary worksIn the words of the great translator of the century Nicolas Perrot drsquoAblancourt(1606ndash64)

It would be a Judaic superstition to attach oneself to the words andabandon the design for which they were used It is only rendering halfof an Author if one cuts off his eloquence As he was agreeable in his ownlanguage he should be so in ours as well and insofar as the beauties andgraces of the two are different we should not hesitate to give him those

of our own country since we are removing his Otherwise we would bemaking an ugly (meschante) copy of an admirable original (1638 citedin Horguelin 1996 76)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

201 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

When Perrotrsquos translation of Tacitusmdashin which he says he sought ldquoto look not somuch to what [the author] said as to what he should say ldquo (cited in ibid 78)mdashcameout during the 1640s the general opinion was that it was a great improvement onthe original But a more extreme statement accompanies his 1654 translation ofthe quite scatological Greek satirist Lucian of Samosata Plainly there is plenty inLucian that would shock seventeenth-century French sensibilities

It was necessary to change all this to make something agreeableotherwise it would not have been Lucian For this reason I do notalways attach myself to the words or the ideas of this Author andmaintaining his goal I arrange things to our air and our style Differenttimes require not only different words but different thoughts and it isthe custom of Ambassadors to dress in the fashion of the land to whichthey have been sent for fear of appearing ridiculous to those they aimto please It is true that this is not strictly speaking Translation but it isbetter than Translation (Cited in Horguelin 1996 80)

Indeed Perrot would write that his translation of Thucydides had brought his au-thor back from the dead in the form of a modern Frenchman this is somethingfor which Thucydides might well have been grateful On the contrary failing tochange the original sufficiently writes Perrot produces a ldquomonstrous bodyrdquo (corpsmonstreux cited in Venuti 1995 47)

Not everyonersquos arguments were as intelligently put as Perrotrsquos Pierre Perrin(c 1620ndash75) the so-called Abbeacute Perrin claimed that his 1648 translation of Virgilbrought Aeneas back as a French cavalier ldquodressed up with pomp and plume andbanglesrdquo (cited in Ladborough 1938 86)

There were a few detractors of this method mainly among philologists and whatwere called the traducteurs scrupuleux (as opposed to Perrot and the traducteurslibres) Among these Gilles Meacutenage (1613ndash92) is reported to have said that Perrotrsquostranslations were like a lady he had once known in Tours she had been belle butinfidegravele Since then the whole movement of elegant domesticating translation hasbeen known as ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

Many worlds

Unlike the French who saw French as the closest linguistic approximation to uni- versal values of reason and art seventeenth-century German scholars valorizedGerman for its very particularity and distinctiveness its German-ness JustusGeorg Schottel (1612ndash76) devotes a section of his Extensive work on the Germanlanguage (1663) to ldquoHow one should en-German (verteutschen)rdquomdashthis is charac-teristically an alternative German word for uumlbersetzen ldquotranslaterdquo

To achieve this [the improvement of German] the arts the scienceshistory and other realia should be dressed and become known in trulynatural German so that our language will not smell of un-GermanSpanish pride or Italian splendour gone stale or French pronunciation

and circumlocutions that are neither here nor there or of other thingsbut it will have its own short and euphonious German nature rich inmeaning and sense (Cited in Lefevere 1977 11)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 9: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

201 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

When Perrotrsquos translation of Tacitusmdashin which he says he sought ldquoto look not somuch to what [the author] said as to what he should say ldquo (cited in ibid 78)mdashcameout during the 1640s the general opinion was that it was a great improvement onthe original But a more extreme statement accompanies his 1654 translation ofthe quite scatological Greek satirist Lucian of Samosata Plainly there is plenty inLucian that would shock seventeenth-century French sensibilities

It was necessary to change all this to make something agreeableotherwise it would not have been Lucian For this reason I do notalways attach myself to the words or the ideas of this Author andmaintaining his goal I arrange things to our air and our style Differenttimes require not only different words but different thoughts and it isthe custom of Ambassadors to dress in the fashion of the land to whichthey have been sent for fear of appearing ridiculous to those they aimto please It is true that this is not strictly speaking Translation but it isbetter than Translation (Cited in Horguelin 1996 80)

Indeed Perrot would write that his translation of Thucydides had brought his au-thor back from the dead in the form of a modern Frenchman this is somethingfor which Thucydides might well have been grateful On the contrary failing tochange the original sufficiently writes Perrot produces a ldquomonstrous bodyrdquo (corpsmonstreux cited in Venuti 1995 47)

Not everyonersquos arguments were as intelligently put as Perrotrsquos Pierre Perrin(c 1620ndash75) the so-called Abbeacute Perrin claimed that his 1648 translation of Virgilbrought Aeneas back as a French cavalier ldquodressed up with pomp and plume andbanglesrdquo (cited in Ladborough 1938 86)

There were a few detractors of this method mainly among philologists and whatwere called the traducteurs scrupuleux (as opposed to Perrot and the traducteurslibres) Among these Gilles Meacutenage (1613ndash92) is reported to have said that Perrotrsquostranslations were like a lady he had once known in Tours she had been belle butinfidegravele Since then the whole movement of elegant domesticating translation hasbeen known as ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

Many worlds

Unlike the French who saw French as the closest linguistic approximation to uni- versal values of reason and art seventeenth-century German scholars valorizedGerman for its very particularity and distinctiveness its German-ness JustusGeorg Schottel (1612ndash76) devotes a section of his Extensive work on the Germanlanguage (1663) to ldquoHow one should en-German (verteutschen)rdquomdashthis is charac-teristically an alternative German word for uumlbersetzen ldquotranslaterdquo

To achieve this [the improvement of German] the arts the scienceshistory and other realia should be dressed and become known in trulynatural German so that our language will not smell of un-GermanSpanish pride or Italian splendour gone stale or French pronunciation

and circumlocutions that are neither here nor there or of other thingsbut it will have its own short and euphonious German nature rich inmeaning and sense (Cited in Lefevere 1977 11)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 10: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 202

Leibnizrsquos writings on German go in the same direction arguing for instance that itwould be a pity if German ended up denatured like English (Leibniz [1697] 1916 30)

The reaction against French models and against all universal abstract stan-dards was part of a wider movement to create a cultural Germany even in theabsence of a political one These tendencies reached their fulfillment in the work ofJohann Gottfried Herder (1744ndash1803) and the following generation of Romantics(see Berman [1984] 1992) Herderrsquos view of human history was one of clear cel-ebration of diversity In explicit rejection of French translation models he insistson fidelity (reue) to the distinctiveness of the source language and the source textand in an echo of Renaissance theorists writes

I certainly do not believe that there exists any language in the worldthat can convey the words of another language with the same force andequivalent words The richest and the most useful language is one thatbest lends itself to word-for-word translations translations that follow

the original step by step (Cited in Sdun 1967 21)Herder goes so far as to propose that the best thing for a languagersquos unique develop-ment might be to keep it pure of all translations all influence from other languagesldquolike a young virginrdquo (cited in ibid 26) These apparent contradictions grow outof a single problematic To argue for foreignizing translations that make other lan-guages and cultures accessible to us each in its unique character or to argue thatwe should stay clear of other languages and cultures so as to preserve our ownunique character are conclusions from a single set of premises that there are amultitude of distinct and unique language-cultures each one valuable This is verydifferent from the assumptions behind ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo

In the early nineteenth century the Romantics mounted a full-scale defense ofldquofaithfulrdquo translation A W von Schlegel criticizes what he calls French transla-tion for making the foreign visitor ldquodress and behave according to [French] cus-tomsrdquo (cited in Lefevere 1992 79) and in the periodrsquos translation manifesto (1813)Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768ndash1834) says that to translate a foreigner as he wouldhave written had he not been foreign is like painting a portrait of a man not as heactually looks but as he would have looked if he had had a different father And itwas Schleiermacher who posed the great dichotomy in a formulation that has beencited in most of the major statements on translation since then

The true translator who really wants to bring together these two entirelyseparate ( ganz getrennten) persons his author and his reader and to assistthe latter in obtaining the most correct and complete understanding andenjoyment possible of the former without however forcing him out ofthe circle of his mother tonguemdashwhat paths are open to the translatorfor this purpose In my opinion there are only two Either the translatorleaves the author in peace as much as possible and moves the readertoward him or he leaves the reader in peace as much as possible andmoves the author toward him ([1813] 1992 41ndash42 translation modified)

Typically Romantic is the insistence here on the separateness and uniqueness of

persons and by implication of their worldsSchleiermacher presents his division as balanced but his sympathies are withtranslation that moves the reader toward the author Where the reverse type offers

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 11: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

203 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

the reader no surprises this has the potential of opening up his or her sensibilitiesand with it that of his or her culture and language After all Schleiermacher wasalso the founder of hermeneutics as a discipline German Romantic foreignizingchallenged French hegemony and called for making Germany a center of intercul-tural ferment at the heart of Europe

Our nation may be destined because of its respect for what is foreignand its mediating nature to carry all the treasures of foreign arts andscholarship together with its own in its language to unite them intoa great historical whole so to speak which would be preserved inthe centre and heart of Europe so that with the help of our languagewhatever beauty the most different times have brought forth can beenjoyed by all people as purely and perfectly as possible for a foreigner(Schleiermacher cited in Venuti 1995 110)

So Germanyrsquos openness to others sets it up to be the center and arbiter of world

cultureSince the positing of clear positions in the seventeenth through the early nine-teenth centuries translation practice in the West has wavered between that of thetreacherous but lovely ldquoBelles Infidegravelesrdquo and that of the faithful Romantics thesetendencies have been called domesticating and foreignizing (eg Bassnett 2014)remarkably untranslatable terms that correspond for instance to the equally uglyFrench cibliste and sourciste

Boas and translation

When he came to America from Germany Franz Boas (1858ndash1942) the founderof modern North American anthropology and linguistics brought the German as-sumption of diversity with him but in a more radical form Given his practice ofdoing research by actually living with ldquoprimitiverdquo people and his goals of attendingto the history of all peoples (Bunzl 2004) and treating all verbal traditions withthe philological respect usually given to Greek and Latin (Boas 1906) Boas sharedneither the nationalist agenda nor the hierarchization of peoples and languagesthat marked most Euro-American thinking about language and culture Insteadhis own political agenda like that of his students was largely contestatory seeing

exposure to alternative ways of living and constructing the world through languageas inherently challenging the prevailing assumptions of the Euro-American societ-ies of his time

From his paper ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo (1889) through the Introduction tothe Handbook of American Indian languages (1911) and into his later writingsBoas focused on examples of misunderstandings between languages and cultures(discussion in Leavitt 2011 130ndash32) His is an anatomy of misreadingsmdashof soundsof the meanings of and relationships among words of grammatical patterns Inevery case the speaker of a given language expects to find familiar patterns whenconfronting a new one and the speakerrsquos errors can be shown to result not from

the inferiority of the other language its lack of structure or vagueness or excessivefussiness as several generations of evolutionists had claimed marked primitive lan-guages but from the mutual interference of different coherent systems Wemdashthat

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 12: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 204

is all speakersmdashmishear sounds misattribute meanings and misconstrue gram-matical forms in a different language because of our own legitimately acquiredprejudices as speakers of our own language and speakers of the other languagewill make exactly the same kinds of mistakesmdashnot the same mistakes but the samekinds of mistakesmdashwhen they try to handle ours

This means that the site of illumination is on the edge on the frontiers betweensystems foreseeable misunderstandings are evidence for the existence of distinctsystems There is a theory of translation inherent in this approach although Boasdid not formulate it as such Once differences have been established the researchershould seek to grasp the forms of the new language as they are actually used notreplace them with familiar forms This is the method propounded by Wilhelm vonHumboldt (1767ndash1835) as for instance when he attacked Jesuit manuals of Japanesefor using largely inapplicable Latin parts of speech (Humboldt [1825] 1906) Boas(1900) similarly criticizes a missionary grammar of Kwakrsquowala for drawing parts ofspeech from English and forcing pieces of Kwakrsquowala into this structure

Such a view of languages as coherent and different systems means that the analystmust not be satisfied with translation equivalents nor take the possibility of glossingas proving that languages are ldquoreallyrdquo the same The fact that an English sentenceinvolving tense might be the best in the sense of the most normal-English gloss of aHopi sentence without tense does not prove that Hopi has ldquotacit tenserdquo A L Beckerhas put this point elegantly in a book with the significant title Beyond translation

Our general tendency is to ldquoread intordquo our experience of a distant languagethe familiar things that are missing all the silences and then we claimthat these things are ldquounderstoodrdquo ldquoimpliedrdquo or ldquopart of the underlying

logical structurerdquo of these languages It takes a while to learn thatthings like tenses and articles and the copula are not ldquounderstoodrdquo inBurmese Javanese or Malay In Burmese these things arenrsquot impliedthey just arenrsquot there (1995 7ndash8)

If required Burmese is perfectly capable of conveying the information carried in tens-es articles and the copula by using its own methods As Boas insisted one can speakof any subject in any languagemdashat the limit one might have to add some vocabularyThis means that referential content can be translated if only sometimes via elaborateparaphrases the fact of translatability of referential content is indeed universal

Boas further elaborated Humboldtrsquos recognition of the importance of obligatory

grammatical categories which oblige the speaker to choose alternatives within agiven realm of experience In English for instance most nouns require a choiceof singular or plural forms finite verb forms require a specification of person andtense that is relationship between the time of speaking and the time of the eventspoken about While it is possible to specify this information when speaking anylanguage plenty of languages do not require their constant specification And oth-er obligatory categories may exist you may be required to specify how you knowwhat you are talking about (evidentiality) or every noun may be classified by itsshape (Jakobson 1959a 1959b Friedrich 1969) This immediately raises a questionof translation How much does one translate obligatory grammatical categories

Should they be suppressed because they are obligatory and therefore ldquoinvisiblerdquoHow does one judge that they are coming into ldquovisibilityrdquo

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 13: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

205 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

This is the central question of Jakobsonrsquos often-quoted paper on translation(1959a) He gives the example of French gender We are told in our high-schoolFrench classes that gender is a purely formal part of French grammar you just haveto memorize that itrsquos la table and le mur but there is no sense in which a table is re-ally thought of as feminine and a wall as masculine (this position is stated in Brownand Lenneberg 1954) Against this Jakobson shows that in some circumstancesgender does play a role in ideation and certainly in connotation5

If we accept this then gender-meaning is there hovering potentially markingevery noun Should we be translating la table as ldquothe table (itrsquos a girl)rdquo Paul Friedrichtried something like this in his treatment of the tale of Uncle Peanut and AuntOnion (1969 30 1979 485) from Pureacutepacha (earlier called Tarascan by outsid-ers) a Mexican language that has fourteen obligatory markers of shape FriedrichrsquosEnglish translation adds little tags indicating the shape of activities The English ofthis text is odd indeed and in fact requires a paragraph of grammatical annotationfor each paragraph of translation It would be hard to tell this story as a story inFriedrichrsquos renderingmdashbut on the other hand his treatment does tell you an enor-mous amount about the Pureacutepacha language and I dare say the Pureacutepacha world

Many of the central arguments in the writings of Boasrsquo students Edward Sapir(1884ndash1939) and Benjamin Lee Whorf (1897ndash1941) deal with obligatory gram-matical categories using the same kind of treatment of examples that Boas doesIn fact this whole Boasian literature on language differences given that it is takingplace in English can be read a series of reflections on translation

The ldquoSapirndashWhorf hypothesisrdquo first proposed in the 1950s well after the deathsof both Sapir and Whorf is often taken to claim that each language is a closed and

sealed system unto itself This is utterly different from the BoasndashSapirndashWhorf prac-tice of operating on the borders of systems with the understanding that passage be-tween worlds is always possible but requires work The reading of Sapir and Whorfas linguistic determinists led to easy refutations first that Whorf contradicted him-self by seeking to describe Hopi concepts in English second that the very fact thattranslation is possible proves that all languages are carrying the same content (Black[1959] 1962 Davidson 1974) This last view should be contrasted with the reverseone maintained by German linguists who did believe that one could never really es-cape the horizon of onersquos native language for them the fact that there are any difficul-ties in translation proves that languages are profoundly different (Bynon 1966 472)

Misery and splendor

During the same decades that Boas and his students were active Saussure-inspiredlinguists and philosophers on the Continent were developing their own theoriesof the systematicity of languages whether through Prague School linguistics or a

5 Going farther in this direction some psychologists (eg Konishi 1993) have startedto find clear sex-based connotations for differing grammatical genders Most recent-

ly Lera Boroditsky has run experiments on native speakers of German and Spanishthat show that gender connotation remains even when they are speaking in English(Boroditsky Schmidt and Phillips 2003)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 14: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 206

developing French structural linguistics represented in the work of Eacutemile Benveniste(1902ndash76) Here as in other fields the recognition of multiple systems typical ofstructuralism parallels the views of the Boasians (see eg Jakobson 1959b)

Within translation one statement of the radical differences among languages isfound in the dialogue ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo ([1937] 2000) bythe Spanish philosopher Joseacute Ortega y Gasset (1883ndash1955) another of the mostanthologized pieces in the translation canon Here is how the case is put in the lastpart of the dialogue ldquoEl esplendorrdquo

ldquoThe simple fact [is] that the translation is not the work but a path (uncamino) toward the work If it is a poetic work the translation is not onebut rather an apparatus a technical artifice that brings us closer to thework without ever trying to repeat or replace it I imagine then aform of translation that is ugly (que sea fea) as science has always beenthat does not claim to wear literary garb that is not easy to read but is

very clear indeed although this clarity may demand copious footnotesThe reader must know beforehand that when he reads a translation hewill not be reading a literarily beautiful book but rather will be using afairly boring apparatus (un aparato bastante enojoso) one however thatwill truly help him transmigrate within the poor man Plato (transmigrardentre del pobre hombre Platoacuten)rdquo (Ortega y Gasset [1937] 2000 61 62translation modified)

I put this quote within quotes because in his dialogue Ortega is not in fact puttingthese words into his own mouthmdashwhich he could well have done since he presentshimself as one of the speakers and he has himself talk quite a lot The scene takes

place in Paris apparently in 1937 during Ortegarsquos exile from the Spanish Civil WarIt happens at the Collegravege de France and is said to involve professors and studentsof the Collegravege This section of the text is provoked by Ortegarsquos asking one of hisinterlocutors described as ldquoa brilliant scholar of linguistics of the new generationrdquoto give his own views on translation If there is any historical reality to this settingthe only person this could possibly have been was Benveniste who was elected tothe Collegravege that very year at the age of thirty-five If we take this attribution seri-ouslymdashas far as I know Benveniste never laid claim to itmdashthen the real source ofthese ideas is the other great structural linguist of Jakobsonrsquos generation this ring-ing repudiation of ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquo in favor of ugly translation and respect for

the otherness of the source textmdashand the source worldmdashcomes not out of Spanishexistentialism but French structuralism The Spanish philosopher is the channeland of all things the translator of Benvenistersquos views on translation

Reference and style

We have seen that Reformation and Renaissance traditions distinguished betweentranslating for what we would call referential meaning which is held to be ap-propriate for sacred and philosophical texts and the much less evident perhaps

impossible process of seeking to capture the full exploitation of the resources ofa language as exemplified in literary texts and we have seen OrtegaBenvenistepropose a radically scientific approach to the otherness of poetic language Scholars

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 15: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

207 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

of the Boasian tradition for their part focused almost exclusively on referentialmeaning which as they maintained can always be translated if you are willing touse enough circumlocutions

The exception within this tradition was in the work of Edward Sapir Sapir un-like Boas and Whorf a student of literature and a poet himself felt he recognizedan implicit poetic character in the very structure of a given language a music inphonetics resonances of suggestion in the choice of words and how words are puttogether and figures implicit in grammatical categories For Sapir once again theideal position is on the edge on the front line between linguistic worlds

Since every language has its distinctive peculiarities the innate formallimitationsmdashand possibilitiesmdashof one literature are never quite the sameas those of another The literature fashioned out of the form and substanceof a language has the color and the texture of its matrix The literary artistmay never be conscious of how he is hindered or helped or otherwiseguided by the matrix but when it is a question of translating his workinto another language the nature of the original matrix manifests itself atonce All his effects have been calculated or intuitively felt with referenceto the formal ldquogeniusrdquo of his own language they cannot be carried overwithout loss or modification (Sapir 1921 227)

Sapir distinguishes different literary styles more or less dependent on the specif-ics of their linguistic material versus their referential content and so more or lesssatisfactorily transferrable between languages This of course recalls the distinctionmade in the Renaissance and Reformation except that these earlier authors reifiedthe problem as one of different kinds of texts rather than different functions of

language as suggested by Sapir and made explicit by Jakobson (1960)The development of a North American school of ethnopoetics in the 1960s and1970s a cooperative enterprise among anthropologists linguists and poets waspredicated on recognizing the Boasian failure to grasp the poetic dimensions ofthe texts being recorded (eg Hymes 1999 on Boas) The ethnopoetic work of DellHymes Dennis Tedlock and their colleagues the effort to rediscover or re-presentpoetic form from non-Western texts can be seen as an attempt to add new di-mensions to translation bringing the reader closer to the singer or teller of talesThe great arguments in ethnopoetics (eg Hymes 1981 Tedlock 1983 cf Mason2008) have been about how to translate and how to present a translated text From

the side of the poets the inspiration for ethnopoetics was exemplified in JeromeRothenbergrsquos experiments in what he called ldquototal translationrdquo seeking again toadd contextual and interpretive dimensions to his English renderings of Senecaritual texts (see Rothenberg 1968)

Sapirrsquos idea of a poetry implicit in the grammar of a language was developed byPaul Friedrich (eg 1986) in ways that had direct implications for translation andparticularly for the dichotomy between the poetic and the supposedly purely refer-ential If a given grammar lends itself to certain connections metaphors metonymsrather than to others then a translator is dealing with an underlying poetics that isthere in the very weave out of which any text is made however referential it may look

In his work on the necessarily situated nature of any enunciation MichaelSilverstein has shown how reference is only one dimension of what are necessarily

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 16: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 208

far more complex communicative acts In particular he has drawn attention toaspects of language that are cross-culturally more or less available to the metalin-guistic awareness of speakers themselves (Silverstein [1981] 2001) thus granting agreater role to the effect of language ideologies on languages themselves than hadbeen allowed in the pure Boasian model Silversteinrsquos work on translation (2003)distinguishes among translation proper that is transfer of referential meaning in-cluding grammatical meaning what he calls transduction the attempt to transferstylistic and indexical qualities of usage and transformation a shift in semioticmodality to try to render some aspect of the situational meaning of the sourceevent6 Silverstein is led to call for a necessary role for ethnography in going as faras transduction

How does one capture the ldquotonerdquo ie indexical penumbra of a word orexpression in a source text by one in a target language used in a highlydistinct culture Clearly something on the order of a cultural analysis of

both systems of usage is a prerequisite to finding a route of transductionin analytic terms that reveal both the similarities and the differences soas to be able to navigate a proper transduction from the source to thetarget (2003 89)

Translation studies and reality

What is usually referred to as translation theory or translation studies has comeinto being since the 1970s as an interdisciplinary field Two developments mark itoff from earlier debates which as we have seen focus primarily on how one shouldtranslate One is the recognition that translation is always carried out within whathas been called the target culture for reasons peculiar to the target society Sincethis is the case whatever strategy of translation one adopts foreignizing translationserves purposes that are defined by the target society as much as does domesticat-ing translation or else it would not be taken on

Another of the developments of recent translation studies has been to recognizethe hard reality of translation practice Instead of simply asking how one shouldtranslate these theorists are also asking what a society chooses to translate andwhy While contemporary translation theory tends to come down in favor of for-

eignizing translations which respect the original and seek to transform the reader(Venuti 1995 Bassnett 2014) normal translation practice continues to be very muchlike ldquoLes Belles Infidegravelesrdquomdashafter all translation is a business and most translationsare made to sell It is clear (Venuti 1995 Bellos 2011) that the mass of translationgoing on in the world is from English to other languages with a much smaller per-centage going in the other direction and this primarily from a very small numberof tongues In translations into English domestication dominates In other words

6 While it is justified with an analogy to energy transducers the choice of the word

ldquotransductionrdquo is translationally problematic since some version of it is already thestandard word for translation in Romance languages (eg traduccedilatildeo traduccioacuten traduc-tion traduzione)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 17: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

209 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

what actually gets translated in substance and style tends to reinforce the hege-mony of Anglo-American and to a lesser degree Western European culture

The question then is what we want to translate and why Anthropologists are ina particularly strong position to bring little-considered texts into the current worldtradition and to do so in a way that allows serious consideration both of the impli-cations of language structure and of the anchoring of the text in particular valuesand particular interpersonal situations

Twilight swinging

Traditionally anthropologists have worked in societies that fall outside the mainconcerns of Western academic history Many of these societies have only recentlyadopted systems of writing and still function to a large degree in oral media Forlinguistic anthropologists working with oral texts the question of translation in-

volves yet another layer of complexity It requires an imagined parcours from per-formance and reception to recording of one kind or another to written fixationin one or more text-artifacts to interpretation and translation (cf Silverstein andUrban 1996) These problems have emerged for me in the most telling way in work-ing on texts emerging out of oral performance traditions of the Central Himalayanregion of Kumaon in what is now the state of Uttarakhand in northern India Theseare largely performed by professionalmdashthat is remuneratedmdashdrummer-singer-poets who are masters of a large number of named genres some narrative someludic many highly ritualized Some of the ritual genres are performatively effective

in bringing gods to be present and to manifest themselves in human bodies in whatthe Western tradition calls possessionIn Kumaon the language spoken by the bulk of the population in their homes

is one or another dialect of Kumaoni a member of the Pahari branch of the Indo-Aryan language family itself a member of the Indo-European family Governmenteducation and commerce are carried out primarily in Hindi the official languageof the state Most Kumaonis are Hindus who interact with a host of regional di-

vinities as well as with the great Hindu gods The regional divinities manifestthemselves ldquoin personrdquo in nocturnal possession rituals called jāgar or ldquowakingrdquotheir appearance is provoked and controlled by the professional drummer-poet

(Gaborieau 1975 Leavitt 1997) All ritual devoted to these regional gods is carriedout in the Kumaoni languageIn what follows I raise some of the questions that have come up in considering

a small part of one of the early sections of a jāgar performance I recorded in 1982 inthe northern part of District Nainital Here the drummer-poet was Sri Kamal RāmĀrya one of the arearsquos better-known performers in a number of oral-poetic genresThe utterances come from the poetrsquos opening invocation to the gods and to thecoming night called sandhyā ldquotwilightrdquo or ldquoeveningrdquo As is usually the case in thistradition this is an oral performance until recently most of the poets were illiter-ate and while Kamal Rām knows how to read and write as far as I can see writing

plays no part in his art For the would-be translator this means that there is a seriesof steps each one riddled with potential pitfalls which must be crossed over beforeone has a ldquosourcerdquo text(-artifact) with which to workmdashand such an artifact is never

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 18: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1828

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 210

the only possible one In the case of the utterances presented here there was a re-cording in situ there was an initial transcription of the recording by Sri Indar SinghNegi an inhabitant of a neighboring village and native speaker of the languagewho had gone through some months working with me and so had an idea of whattranscription involved Then transcriber and translatormdashand this of course meantthat the translator already had done the basic work of phonological and grammati-cal analysis of the languagemdashread over the transcription together while listening tothe recording making corrections and asking for explanations In some cases wereturned to the poet for explanations but these were rarely forthcoming for thepoet himself his performative skill was never considered as separate from its exege-sis (as is the case for instance of Yugoslav bards Lord 1960 cf Tedlock 1983 3)After various iterations and revisions we had a text-artifact in ldquotherdquo Kumaoni lan-guage ldquotherdquo is in quotes because our transcription represented only the dialect anddistinctive diction of this singer and to some degree only on this occasion

Note one of the crucial differences between this kind of ethnographic pretrans-lation involving the creation of a text-artifact and standard text translation theformer involves living performers and living interpreters and so must necessarilybe collaborative in nature (cf McDowell 2000) How collaborative it is in whatdirection the questions and answers go depends on the situation but it has thepotential to shake up the usual flows of information

The initial questions are thus those which center not on how to translate fromcode to code (ie from Kumaoni to English) but on how in Jakobsonrsquos terms tooperate an intersemiotic transfer (ie from speech to writing) Can we present thetranscribed text in a way that preserves some of the qualities of a performance that

has rhythmic dynamic and melodic dimensions Even if a ldquototalrdquo transcription isimpossible Dennis Tedlock (1983) has shown that experimenting with transcrip-tion can allow the indication of elements of a performance which are lost in a stan-dard prose or verse transcription

Here is an initial transcription of some verses with interlinear treatment of thefirst including indications of grammatical marking7 Kumaoni nouns have threecases direct oblique and vocativemdashwhich are only overtly distinguished in somenounsmdashtwo genders and two numbers Like other modern Indo-Aryan languagesKumaoni makes constant use of compound verbs in which the first element carriesthe referential meaning while the second modifies or orients the way of being or

doing and carries the grammatical information jhulani sandhyā mẽ kyā kām hai rĩ swing twilight in what work be become remain Vpplfsob Nfsob pp Ampdir Nmpdir Vconj Vpast3p swinging twilight-in what works have become In the swinging twilight what works have been done

7 The following abbreviations are used here for grammatical terms N = noun A = adjec-tive P = pronoun V = verb pp = postposition ppl = present participle m = masculine

f = feminine s = singular p = plural dir = direct obl = oblique voc = vocative conj= conjunctive verb form pres = present past = past numbers indicate first second orthird person

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 19: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 1928

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

211 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhat mẽ Lord my father twilight - of time - in Nmsvoc Amsvoc Nmsvoc Nfsob ppmob Nmsob pp Lord my father of twilight at the time Lord my father at twilight time

isvar mero bābā gāi bachan kā bādan lāgĩ cow calf - of tying lay put Nfsob Nmpob ppmpdir Nmpdir Vpast3p of cow of calves tyings have been put on Lord my father the cow and calves have been tied up

ghōl ki caṛ i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha isvar mero bābā sandhyā kā bakhatmẽbāt i bat auv ko d yār jo cha isvar mero bābā bāt ai bādi go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ godi ko bālak jo cha god mẽ sukālo hai go isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ tumāro nām lhinũ isvar mero bābā

The little bird of the nest has gone into the nest Lord my father at twilight timethe traveler on the road Lord my father has tied his camp on the road Lord myfather at twilight time the child of the lap has become happy in the lap Lord myfather at twilight time we take your name Lord my father

What we have offered is a fairly straightforward transfer of the referential meaningof this fragment of a text-artifact But even here a great deal has been added and agreat deal supressed Kumaoni like other North Indian languages has masculineand feminine gender and feminizing a word is often used as a diminutive here

the ldquolittle birdrdquo is my pragmatic reading of what in fact is ldquofemale birdrdquo I have sup-pressed the repeated use of jo cha ldquowho isrdquo which seems to me to be a nonsemanticfiller in Kumaoni bardic performance How to handle the semantic penumbras ofisvar borrowed from Sanskrit Īśvara a title of God associated with certain schoolsof Hinduism but not others and which I have simply given as ldquoLordrdquo or bābā boththe vocative of bāp ldquofatherrdquo and the word for a guru or spiritual ldquofatherrdquo Kumaonihaving no determinative article I have put in ldquotherdquo where it seemed appropriatealthough the translation could as well read ldquoa little bird has gone into a nestrdquo

This is a series of utterances that have only been heard never written downexcept by Sri Indra Singh Negi by hand in prose presentation on sheets of lined

paper Basing myself on the poetrsquos apparent phrasing rather than his pauses I couldas well transcribe it

ghōl ki car i jo cha ghōl mẽ lhai gai cha

isvar mero bābāsandhyā kā bakhat mẽ

and so forth rendering it something like

as twilight swings what works are worked

Lord my father at twilight time

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 20: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2028

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 212

Lord my father cows calves have been tied up nestrsquos little bird in the nest has gone Lord my father at twilight time

The basic syntax of the Kumaoni sentence as we have seen is SubjectndashObjectndashVerb This means that in unmarked discourse the verb acts as a sealant of sentencesor clauses which appear as packages with the complements tucked in between thesubject and the verb In Kumaoni narrative poetry this structure is nice and tighteach line is a clause usually a sentence ending unambiguously with the verb In thesandhyā too which is emphatically nonnarrative many clauses do end with verbsagain helping to mark each one off as clearly as the stress on the first syllable marksoff half-clauses but syntactic ambiguity comes in when we try to find a place to

put nonsentence clauses like ldquoLord my fatherrdquo which must be connected to whatprecedes or what follows but give us no hint as to which option is to be preferred

Thus the first transcription and tentative translation in paragraph-like blocksdoes convey something of the textrsquos weird syntagmatic structure a string of clausesthat can be connected up in several ways making it impossible to tell where onesentence ends and the next begins Like the relentless repetitions the ambiguousclausal pattern of this opening recitativemdasha pattern that is completely differentfrom that of narrative parts of the ritualmdashserves to hook in and focus the atten-tion of the listeners whether divine or human What in more standard discoursewould be clearly distinguished sentences here overlap to form much longer units

along which the listener is pulled This quality is conveyed better I think in blocksrather than say in breath-lines (Olson [1950] 1997) or in a transcription strictlybased on timing The poet seems to be at pains to push the line of language throughhis breaths to create somewhat longer units themselves divided by periods of his

voicersquos silence and the continuing beating of the drumBut already this choice of transcription using clauses separated by commas

rather than say imposing a standard sentence-structure involves a preliminaryanalysis of the relations among the participants in the ritual that the singer issinging to gods and ancient gurus that the audience is there as privileged over-hearers In the ritual world the point of this section is to invite and pull in the

gods into what we may call the empirical world that available to immediate ob-servation the most evident thing about the performance of the sandhyā is the wayit seems to trap the attention of the assembled people who as it begins are chat-ting away but are silent and attentive five minutes later when the chant has takenover The point of this part of the ritual is to capture and hold the attention of allthese interlocutors divine and human The choice of how to present a transcrip-tion and a translation in other words already presupposes what Silverstein calls atransductional analysis

Looking at other levels of language adds to the complexity of the task Phoneticsand phonology represent the most evidently untranslatable level The Kumaoni

text is full of alliteration this short passage is extremely heavy with initial bs and g sboth unaspirated and aspirated Other parts of this section rely heavily on rhyming

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 21: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2128

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

213 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

which will either be lost in translation or to be maintained will require suppres-sions of and additions to elements of the referential sense

Rhythm and stress are also lost in translation Kumaoni has a stress accent onthe first syllable of most words In this text there is a steady beat of hyperstressedsyllables at the beginning of each half-clause ( gāi bachan kā bād an lāgĩ ) maintain-ing a pattern that allows varying numbers of relatively unstressed syllables to be in-serted between the stresses A translation even into another word-stress languagesuch as English loses the accent that here metricalizes half-clauses this might beindicated by adding boldface to the translation as I have added it to the transcrip-tion above or if in an oral rendition by reading aloud with the right stresses Buthere other problems this time from the ldquotargetrdquo language impose themselves topresent something like normal English determiners are unavoidable adjectivesprecede nouns and word order is SubjectndashVerbndashObject rather than the SubjectndashObjectndashVerb order of Kumaoni and almost all other South Asian languages If westress the first syllable of each half-clause in English different words are accen-tuated than in the Kumaoni and these turn out to be words that donrsquot ldquodeserverdquothe stress ldquoThe cow and the calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo If we stress the words corresponding semantically to thosestressed in the Kumaoni we lose the distinction among half-clauses ldquoThe cow andthe calfhave been tied up the little bird of the nesthas gone into the nestrdquo Andif we force the English words into a Kumaoni order we have a monstrosity but onethat maintains something like the rhythm ldquoCow calfrsquostying have-done nestrsquos birdienest-in has gonerdquo This is the only way to give the reader an idea of what isgoing on It hardly can stand by itself but requires explanation with reference to

the transcription-artifact to which the reader must have access It is a case of goingldquobeyond translationrdquoWord choice too is always problematic we can find English glosses for the im-

portant words in the Kumaoni text but to understand what they are doing therethey must be explained or annotated An exegetical paratext must surround thetext The oft-repeated word sandhyā which is also the name given to this sectionof the ritual means far more than simply twilight or evening in orthoprax Hindu-ism it is the word used for both of the junctures between day and night whichare holiest moments of the daily cycle and for the prayer said at dawn and duskIts phonology also marks it as a borrowing from Sanskrit the sacred language

rather than an inherited Kumaoni word the Kumaoni word for evening whichhas undergone the expected transformations from Sanskrit is satilde s Thus the wordsandhyā has religious connotations that the English word twilight (or alternativesdusk evening) does not This choice of the word ties the immediate perceptiblescene into a cosmic scene which is exactly what this section of the ritual is seek-ing to do

Kumaoni oral poetry is not memorized but composed in performance by com-bining fixed formulas (see the ideal model in Lord 1960)8 Giving that this is aliving tradition other poets from the same tradition are available to be listenedto and are being listened to by thousands of people today The performance of

8 This is not always the case with oral poetry The Veda Inuit poetry and Somali poetry(Finnegan 1977) were or are orally composed then memorized word for word

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 22: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2228

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 214

any given poet can change from twilight to twilight while Kamal Rāmrsquos sandhyāsshow great stability in style and wording they too are longer or shorter dependingon the occasion And each poet has his own style or styles (they are mainly men)each drawing on a treasury of formulas that are largely shared across the regionThe intertextuality is extraordinarily dense this rendition of the sandhyā by thispoet on this night echoes others at many degrees of distance The reality of this

variation could certainly be called to the readerrsquos attention which means that thetranslated text is no longer the sole text but becomes one element in a potentialmultitext of variations (as now exemplified for Homer see the Homer Multitextwebsite) In the single recording we possess of one of his jāgars the most famousKumaoni oral poet of recent generations Gopi Das of Kausani (c 1900ndash75)9 be-gins his sandhyā

dhārā d uba dinā devogār otilde par i chāyāhari jagadīsā o devogār otilde par i chāyā

The day has sunk down on the mountain crests godsin the valleys shadowhas fallenOh Lord oh godsin the valleys shadow has fallen

And he too uses the trope of birds returning to the nest at twilight time

cārā or o kā panchī laicārā or o bāso lhai cha ghōlā ko panchī laighōlotilde mē bāso lhai cha Birds of the four directionshave settled in the four directions Birds of the nesthave settled in the nest

The poet Jay Rām whom I was able to record in a village close to that of KamalRām the previous year chanted

ghōl ki car i ghōl mẽ bait h rai cha gāy bāchotilde kā badan bāndhi jānĩ nau lākhtārā khul jānĩ jan gal kā ghasyāri ai jānĩ pān i kā panār ai jānĩ

The little bird of the nest is sitting in the nest the cow and the calves havebeen tied up the nine hundred thousand stars have opened up the grass-cutting girl has come from the forest the drawers of water have come fromthe water

And each of these singers had his own rhythm his own melody for the sandhyā

quite different from those of the othersAt the same time an oral text like this is only realized in a unique situation eth-nographic information about it and around it are a necessary part of the philologyof the text This is a song sung at (and about) nightfall a sacred time when ruralfamilies do in fact come back together from the day in the fields in the forests orat a job just as birds go back to their nests just as the grazing cows come back tobe tied up in the cow-basement In this song of crepuscular invitation the gods arebeing asked to enter this human house at this moment of daily reuniting The textis in fact the part of the ritual that indexically centers this spot where the ritual

9 Gopi Das was recorded in 1970 by Marc Gaborieau to whom I am grateful for grantingme access to the audiotape An epic sung by Gopi Das and a long interview with thesinger can be found in Meissner (1985)

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 23: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2328

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

215 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

is taking place in a transformed landscape now to be identified with the gods ofregional mythology The different realizations of this theme are capitalizing on thislived fact of Kumaoni rural life and perhaps on a fantasy of idealized hill life theyare conveying it in beautiful rhythmic language and they are doing so to specifictransformative effect

In a case like this a verbal object a text illuminates aspects of wider life at thesame time there is no way to understand what the text itself is doing in its worldwithout an ethnographic exposition of broader aspects of that world To what ex-tent is this true of any translation

Conclusion

Unlike translators and publishers who have to make a living proposing palatableequivalences anthropologists have their own agenda In the North American tradi-tion at least this has involved the attempt to understand nonmodern non-Westernways of living and speaking in a way that usually constitutes at least an implicitcritique of the idea of the universality naturalness and correctness of our own Interms of translation anthropologistsmdashthose who are prepared to treat texts not as amodel for but as anchoring points in the movement of life we label society and cul-turemdashcould offer a radically sourcist radically contextualizing and collaborativetranslation practice which seeks to open up a text and its world to the reader ratherthan replacing it with an easy-to-assimilate rendering of what some intermediarydecides is its relevant referential content (cf Leavitt 2005)

Such revelation recalls the methods of the old philology it requires going intothe text in its specificity but also into the specificity of its language and its generictradition it demands a contextualization of the text in its worldmdasha world the exis-tence which you become aware of because you sense its boundary effects on yourown Anthropologists are uniquely suited for working on the edges of languagesand worlds making the differences manifest keeping the paradoxes sharp andalive As Dell Hymes (1981) called for an anthropological philology perhaps thiswould be a philological anthropology For such a text-focused practice translationwould also be exegesis exegesis requires ethnography and ethnography requirescollaboration

Professional translators it is clear have to avoid monstrosities and ldquounreadablerdquorenditions But anthropologists need not fear monsters they are uniquely posi-tioned to respond to OrtegaBenvenistersquos call for ugly translations They are free toexperiment with forms of ldquoexperience-closerdquo transcription so as to include aspectsof orality and the particular circumstances of a performance and translation to tryto bring worlds together If this means having to deal with ldquoEnglish monstrositiesrdquo(McDowell 2000 225) then so be it we should seek not only ldquoto acquire a senseof how natives hear their poetryrdquo (ibid 229) but also to change ourselves and ourreaders so that what at first sight is a linguistic monstrosity can come to sound likepoetry This means a violation of the literary and to a degree of the social canons

we have all internalized

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 24: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2428

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 216

And this would not take place in a social void there is a small but real public intodayrsquos societies if made up only of anthropologistsrsquo students and colleaguesmdashbutit certainly goes beyond themmdashfor trying to understand other worlds

Acknowledgments

I am grateful to the organizers of and other participants in the ldquoTranslating Worldsrdquocolloquium for their invitation and comments and to the anonymous readers forH983137983157 for their very helpful suggestions Special thanks to Luke Fleming for hisclose reading and perspicacious advice This paper is dedicated to the memory ofAlton L Becker (1932ndash2011) When not marked or cited from published translatedworks translations are my own

References

Asad Talal 1986 ldquoThe concept of cultural translation in British social anthropologyrdquo InWriting culture he politics and poetics of ethnography edited by James Clifford andGeorge E Marcus 141ndash64 Berkeley University of California Press

Bassnett Susan 2014 ranslation studies Fourth edition London Routledge

Becker A L 1995 Beyond translation Essays toward a modern philology Ann Arbor Uni- versity of Michigan Press

Bellos David 2011 Is that a fish in your ear London Allen Lane

Berman Antoine (1984) 1992 he experience of the foreign Culture and translation inRomantic Germany Translated by S Heyvaert Albany NY SUNY Press

Black Max (1959) 1962 ldquoLinguistic relativity The views of Benjamin Lee Whorfrdquo In Models and metaphors 244ndash57 Ithaca NY Cornell University Press

Boas Franz 1889 ldquoOn alternating soundsrdquo American Anthropologist 2 47ndash53

mdashmdashmdash 1900 ldquoSketch of the Kwakiutl languagerdquo American Anthropologist (NS) 2 708ndash21

mdashmdashmdash 1906 ldquoSome philological aspects of anthropological researchrdquo Science 23 641ndash45

mdashmdashmdash 1911 ldquoIntroductionrdquo In Handbook of American Indian languages edited by FranzBoas 1ndash83 Washington DC Government Printing Office

Boroditsky Lera Lauren A Schmidt and Webb Phillips 2003 ldquoSex syntax and seman-ticsrdquo In Language in mind edited by Dedre Gentner and Susan Goldin-Meadow 61ndash79Cambridge MA MIT Press

Brower Reuben A 1959 ldquoSeven Agamemnonsrdquo In On translation edited by Reuben ABrower 173ndash95 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Brown Roger and Eric H Lenneberg 1954 ldquoA study in language and cognitionrdquo Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 49 454ndash62

Bunzl Matti 2004 ldquoBoas Foucault and the lsquonative anthropologistrsquo Notes toward a Neo-Boasian anthropologyrdquo American Anthropologist 106 435ndash42

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 25: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2528

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

217 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Bynon Theodora 1966 ldquoLeo Weisgerberrsquos four stages in linguistic analysisrdquo Man (NS) 1468ndash83

Davidson Donald 1974 ldquoOn the very idea of a conceptual schemerdquo Proceedings and Addresses of the American Philosophical Association 47 5ndash20

Demonet Marie-Luce 1992 Les voix du signe Nature et origine du langage agrave la Renaissance(1480ndash1580) Paris Honoreacute Champion

Descartes Reneacute 1984 he philosophical writings Translated by John Cottingham RobertStoothoff and Dugald Murdoch Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Dubois Claude-Gilbert 1970 Mythe et langage au seiziegraveme siegravecle Bordeaux Ducros

Finnegan Ruth 1977 Oral poetry Cambridge Cambridge University Press

Friedrich Paul 1969 ldquoOn the meaning of the Tarascan suffixes of spacerdquo International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 23

mdashmdashmdash 1979 ldquoPoetic language and the imaginationrdquo In Language context and the imagina-tion 441ndash517 Stanford Stanford University Press

mdashmdashmdash 1986 he language parallax Austin University of Texas Press

Gaborieau Marc 1975 ldquoLa transe rituelle dans lrsquoHimalaya central folie avatar meacutedita-tionrdquo Purushartha 2 147ndash72

Geertz Clifford 1973 he interpretation of cultures New York Basic Books

Gelli Giovan Battista (1551) 1976 ldquoI caprici del Bottaiordquo In Opere Edited by DelmoMaestri Third edition 125ndash288 Turin Union Tipografico-Editrice Torinese

Hagegravege Claude 1985 Lrsquohomme de paroles Paris FayardHandman Courtney 2007 ldquoAccess to the soul Native language and authenticity in Papua

New Guinea Bible translationrdquo In Consequences of contact Language ideologies andsociocultural transformations in Pacific societies edited by Miki Makihara and Bambi BSchieffelin 166ndash88 Oxford Oxford University Press

Horguelin Paul A 1996 raducteurs franccedilais des XVIe et XVIIe siegravecles Montreal Linguatech

Huumlllen Werner 2001 ldquoReflections on language in the Renaissancerdquo In Language typologyand language universals Vol I edited by Martin Haspelmath Ekkehard Koumlnig WulfOesterreicher and Wolfgang Raible 210ndash21 Berlin Walter de Gruyter

Humboldt Wilhelm von (1825) 1906 ldquoNotice sur une grammaire japonaise imprimeacutee agraveMexicordquo In Gesammelte Schriften V Edited by Albert Leitzmann 237ndash47 Berlin BBehr

Hymes Dell 1981 ldquoIn vain I tried to tell yourdquo Essays in Native American ethnopoeticsPhiladelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

mdashmdashmdash 1999 ldquoBoas on the threshold of ethnopoeticsrdquo In heorizing the Americanist tradi-tion edited by Lisa Philips Valentine and Regna Darnell 84ndash107 Toronto Universityof Toronto Press

Jakobson Roman 1959a ldquoLinguistic aspects of translationrdquo In On translation edited by

Reuben A Brower 232ndash38 Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 26: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2628

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 218

mdashmdashmdash 1959b ldquoBoasrsquo view of grammatical meaningrdquo In he anthropology of Franz Boasedited by Walter Goldschmidt 139ndash45 Washington DC American AnthropologicalAssociation

mdashmdashmdash 1960 ldquoLinguistics and poeticsrdquo In Style in language edited by Thomas E Sebeok350ndash77 Cambridge MA MIT Press

Kalmar Ivan 1987 ldquoThe Voumllkerpsychologie of Lazarus and Steinthal and the modernconcept of culturerdquo Journal of the History of Ideas 48 671ndash90

Konishi Toshi 1993 ldquoThe semantics of grammatical gender A cross-cultural studyrdquo Journal of Psycholinguistic Research 22 519ndash34

Ladborough R W 1938 ldquoTranslations from the Ancients in seventeenth-century Francerdquo Journal of the Warburg Institute 2 (2) 85ndash104

Leavitt John 1997 ldquoThe language of the gods Craft and inspiration in Central Himalayanritual discourserdquo In Poetry and prophecy edited by John Leavitt 129ndash68 Ann Arbor

University of Michigan Pressmdashmdashmdash 2005 ldquoThick translation Three soundingsrdquo In Language culture and the individual

A tribute to Paul Friedrich edited by Catherine OrsquoNeil Mary Scoggin and Paul Tuite79ndash108 Munich LINCOM

mdashmdashmdash 2011 Linguistic relativities Language diversity and modern thought CambridgeCambridge University Press

Lefevere Andreacute 1977 ranslating literature he German tradition from Luther to Rosenz-weig Assen Van Gorcum

Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm (1697) 1916 ldquoUnvorgreifliche Gedanken betreffend dieAusuumlbung und Verbesserung der deutschen Spracherdquo In Deutsche Schriften I edited byWalther Schmied-Kowarzik 25ndash54 Leipzig Felix Meiner

Lord Albert Bates 1960 he singer of tales Cambridge MA Harvard University Press

Mason Catharine 2008 ldquoEthnographie de la poeacutetique de la performancerdquo Cahiers deLitteacuterature Orale 63ndash64 261ndash94

McDowell John H 2000 ldquoCollaborative ethnopoetics A view from the Sibundoy ValleyrdquoIn ranslating Native Latin American verbal art edited by Kay Sammons and Joel Sher-zer 211ndash32 Washington DC Smithsonian Institution Press

Meissner Konrad 1985 Mālushāhī and Rājulā A ballad from Kumāūn (India) as sung byGopī Dās Wiesbaden Otto Harrassowitz

OrsquoLaughlin Bridget 1978 Review of Marshall Sahlins Culture and practical reason Dialec-tical Anthropology 3 97ndash104

Olson Charles (1950) 1997 ldquoProjective verserdquo In Collected prose 239ndash49 Berkeley Uni- versity of California Press

Ortega y Gasset Joseacute (1937) 2000 ldquoThe misery and splendor of translationrdquo Translated byElizabeth Gamble Miller In he translation studies reader edited by Lawrence Venuti49ndash63 London Routledge

Pinker Steven 1994 he language instinct New York William Morrow

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 27: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2728

2014 | H983137983157 Journal of Ethnographic Teory 4 (2) 193ndash220

219 W983151983154983140983155 983137983150983140 983159983151983154983148983140983155

Povinelli Elizabeth 2001 ldquoRadical worlds The anthropology of incommensurability andinconceivabilityrdquo Annual Review of Anthropology 30 319ndash34

Ricoeur Paul 1973 ldquoThe model of the text Meaningful action considered as a textrdquo NewLiterary History 5 91ndash117

Robinson Doug (1996) 1997 ldquoTranslation as phantom limbrdquo In What is translation 113ndash31 Kent OH Kent State University Press

Rosenzweig Franz (1926) 1994 ldquoScripture and Lutherrdquo In Scripture and translationMartin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig Translated by Lawrence Rosenwald and EverettFox 47ndash69 Bloomington Indiana University Press

Rothenberg Jerome ed 1968 echnicians of the sacred New York Doubleday

Rubel Paula G and Abraham Rosman eds 2003 ranslating cultures Oxford Berg

Sapir Edward 1921 Language Boston Houghton Mifflin

Schleiermacher Friedrich (1813) 1992 ldquoOn the different methods of translatingrdquo Trans-lated by Waltraud Bartscht In heories of translation edited by Rainer Schulte and JohnBiguenet 36ndash54 Chicago University of Chicago Press

Sdun Winfried 1967 Probleme und heorien des Uumlbersetzens in Deutschland MunichHueber

Silverstein Michael (1981) 2001 ldquoThe limits of awarenessrdquo In Linguistic anthropology Areader edited by Alessandro Duranti 382ndash402 Malden MA Blackwell

mdashmdashmdash 2003 ldquoTranslation transduction transformation Skating lsquoglossandorsquo on thin se-miotic icerdquo In ranslating cultures edited by Paula G Rubel and Abraham Rosman

75ndash108 Oxford BergSilverstein Michael and Greg Urban 1996 ldquoThe natural history of discourserdquo In he natu-

ral history of discourse edited by Michael Silverstein and Greg Urban 1ndash17 ChicagoUniversity of Chicago Press

Speroni Sperone (1542) 2009 Dialogo delle lingueDialogue des langues Translated byGeacuterard Genot and Paul Larivaille Paris Les Belles Lettres

Stankiewicz Edward 1981 ldquoThe lsquogeniusrsquo of language in sixteenth-century linguisticsrdquo InLogos semantikos Vol I edited by Juumlrgen Trabant 177ndash89 Madrid Gredos

Steiner George 1975 After Babel London Oxford University Press

Tedlock Dennis 1983 he spoken word and the work of interpretation PhiladelphiaUniversity of Pennsylvania Press

Stocking George W Jr 1968 Race culture and evolution Essays in the history of anthropol-ogy New York Free Press

Venuti Lawrence 1995 he translatorrsquos invisibility London Routledge

Webster Anthony K 2014 ldquoIn favor of sound Linguistic relativity and Navajo poetryrdquoPaper presented to the Symposium about Language and SocietymdashAustin (SALSA)XXII Austin Texas

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca

Page 28: John Leavitt Words and worlds

8102019 John Leavitt Words and worlds

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulljohn-leavitt-words-and-worlds 2828

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 220

Mots et mondes Ethnographie et theacuteorie de la traduction

Reacutesumeacute Si les diffeacuterences de langues orientent les locuteurs vers diffeacuterents aspectsde lrsquoexpeacuterience alors la traduction peut ecirctre conccedilue comme un passage entre diffeacute-rents mondes veacutecus Cet article retrace les moments cleacutes drsquoune histoire reacutecente de

la theacuteorie de la traduction en Occident et deacutefend lrsquoideacutee que la traduction et lrsquoeth-nographie ont besoin lrsquoune de lrsquoautre Nrsquoeacutetant pas sujets agrave lrsquoinjonction qui requiertdes traducteurs professionnels des textes facilement assimilables pour un publiccibleacute les anthropologues sont particuliegraverement bien placeacutes pour mener agrave bien destraductions qui rendent compte du contexte avec attention et des ethnographiescentreacutees sur des textes De telles traductions laquo laides raquo (Ortega y Gasset) peuventcontraindre le lecteur agrave se reacuteorienter lui-mecircme agrave franchir la frontiegravere avec ce quiconstitue potentiellement un autre monde crsquoest agrave dire initialement un autre lan-gage-monde En consideacuterant lrsquohistoire nous cherchons agrave distinguer la traductionde son contenu reacutefeacuterentiel - ce qui constitue une ambition reacutealisable - et agrave traduire

des eacuteleacutements stylistiques et indexicaux (contextuels) - ce qui a souvent eacuteteacute deacuteclareacuteimpossible Cet article explore les implications de ces arguments en srsquoappuyant surdes arteacutefacts textuels reacutedigeacutes agrave partir de traditions orales de lrsquoHimalaya central

John L983141983137983158983145983156983156 teaches in the anthropology department of the Universiteacute deMontreacuteal specializing in linguistic anthropology He has conducted field researchin the Central Himalayas of northern India and in Ireland and has published oncomparative mythology oral poetry and the history of linguistic relativity

John Leavitt Deacutepartement drsquoanthropologie Universiteacute de Montreacuteal CP 6128 Succursale Centre-Ville Montreacuteal Queacutebec

Canada H3C 3J7 johnleavittumontrealca